Texas Instruments voyage 200 User Manual

Texas Instruments voyage 200 - Voyage 200 Calculator Manual

Texas Instruments voyage 200 manual content summary:

  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1
    Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator 1
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 2
    sole and exclusive liability of Texas Instruments, regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the purchase price of this product. Moreover, Texas Instruments shall not be liable for from that to which the receiver is connected. Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator Graphing Calculator 2
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 3
    help. Caution: Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Texas Instruments may void your authority to operate the equipment. © 2005 Texas Instruments Incorporated Windows and Macintosh are trademarks of their respective owners. Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator Graphing
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 4
    . The cover should snap into place. Turning on your Voyage™ 200 for the first time After installing the batteries included with the calculator, press ´. The Apps desktop appears. Note: If your calculator initializes the preinstalled Apps, a progress bar will appear with the message "Installation in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 5
    starting point for operating your Voyage™ 200. Your installed Apps appear on the Apps desktop as icons organized in categories for easy access. From the Apps desktop, you can: • Open Apps. • Select and edit categories of Apps. • View all of the Apps installed on your calculator. • View the full name
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 6
    . Î Check status line information. Ï Select category of Apps. Ð Edit categories. To return to the Apps desktop at any time, press O. The last category selected appears with the last open App highlighted. Removing and replacing the cover (Voyage™ 200) To remove the cover: 1. Hold the unit with one
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 7
    3. Lift the cover by the lip. To replace the cover, position it over the calculator with the lip in front and snap in place. Lip Stowing the cover To stow the cover, position it upside-down beneath the calculator with the lip in front and snap in place. Getting Started 7
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 8
    appears with the same settings and memory contents retained. (If you turned off the Apps desktop, the calculator Home screen appears.) You can use either of the following keys to turn off the Voyage™ 200. Press: Description 2 ® (press 2 Settings and memory contents are retained by and then press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 9
    • When you turn the Voyage™ 200 on again, it will be exactly as you left it. Note: ® is the second function of the ´ key. The calculator's Automatic Power Down™ ( APD does not occur if a calculation or program is in progress, unless the program is paused. If a program is running but waiting for a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 10
    Voyage™ 200 keys Ê Ë Î Ì Í Voyage™ 200 keys Ê Function keys (ƒ- Š) open toolbar menus, access Apps, and edit categories of Apps. Getting Started 10
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 11
    performs math and scientific functions. Í QWERTY keyboard is similar to a computer keyboard. Î Modifier keys (2, 8, 7, 1) add features by increasing the number of key commands. QWERTY keyboard If you're familiar with typing on a computer, you're on your way to using the Voyage™ 200 QWERTY keyboard
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 12
    2. Use the cursor keys to select a category. A submenu lists the characters in that category. 3. Use the cursor keys to select a character, and press ¸. Example: Enter the right arrow symbol (→) in the Text Editor. Press 2G Result 4 Scroll down for more characters. Getting Started 12
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 13
    the corresponding key. Press N to close the map. Example: Use the keyboard map to find the quotation symbol (") shortcut and enter the symbol in the Program Editor. Press 8" Result Getting Started 13
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 14
    menu options, and other operations. Second functions are printed above their corresponding keys in the same color as the 2 key. Accesses Apps, menu options, and other operations. Diamond functions are printed above their corresponding keys in the same color as the 8 key. Types an uppercase character
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 15
    drawing on a graph. Example: Access the VAR-LINK [All] screen, where you can manage variables and Apps. Press 2° Result Function keys Use the function keys to perform the following operations: • On the Apps desktop, open Apps and select or edit Apps categories. • On the calculator Home screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 16
    or D moves the cursor in the corresponding direction. Depending on the App, and depending on whether the 2 orr8 modifier key is used, confuse the negation key (?) with the subtraction key (|). To enter a number in scientific notation: 1. Type the numbers that precede the exponent. (This value can be
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 17
    Example: On the calculator Home screen, enter 0.00685 using scientific notation. Press 6¶85 Result 2^ ?3 ¸ Other important keys Key Command 8# 8$ 8% 8& 8' Description Displays the Y= Editor. Displays the Window Editor. Displays the Graph screen. Sets parameters for the Table screen. Displays
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 18
    is saved. Creates new file. Opens an existing file you specify. Displays the FORMATS or GRAPH FORMATS dialog box, where you enter format information for the active App. Displays the Apps desktop. With the Apps desktop off, displays the FLASH APPLICATIONS menu. Switches between the last two chosen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 19
    select Greek letters, international accented characters, and other special characters.. • In full-screen mode, displays the Apps desktop. • In split-screen mode, displays the full-screen view of the active App. • With the Apps desktop off, displays the calculator Home screen. Getting Started 19
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 20
    is turned off, the Constant Memory™ feature retains all of the mode settings you have selected. To view the Voyage™ 200 mode settings: 1. Press 3. Page 1 of the MODE dialog box appears. 2. Press „ or ... to display the modes listed on Page 2 or Page 3. Note: Modes that are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 21
    Press ã„ ... Result Changing mode settings Example: Change the Language mode setting to Spanish (Español). Press 3 Result Getting Started 21
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 22
    Press ... Scroll down to the Language field. D Press B and then press D until 3:Español is highlighted. Note: Your menu list might vary, depending on the languages installed. ¸ Result Getting Started 22
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 23
    the Catalog to access a list of Voyage™ 200 commands, including functions, instructions, and user-defined programs. Commands are listed alphabetically. Commands not beginning with a letter are found at the end of the list etc.). The Catalog Help App includes details about each command. Options not
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 24
    2E (displays Built-in commands) Result ... (displays Flash Apps commands, if any) † (displays User-Defined commands, if any) Select commands from the Catalog and insert them onto the calculator Home screen entry line or paste them to other Apps, such as the Y= Editor, Text Editor, or CellSheet
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 25
    Example: Insert the comDenom( command on the calculator Home screen entry line. Note: Before selecting a command, position the cursor where you want the command to appear. Pressing 2 D advances the Catalog list one page
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 26
    is the starting point for math operations, including executing instructions, evaluating expressions, and viewing results. To display the calculator Home screen, press: ¹ ". You can also display the calculator Home screen from the Apps desktop by highlighting the Home icon and pressing ¸. Getting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 27
    . Ì Result of last entry is displayed here. (Note that results are not displayed on the entry line.) Í Status line shows the current state of the calculator. Î Entry line displays your current entry. Ï Your previous entry is displayed here. To return to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 28
    screen. Use the history area to: • Review previous entries and answers. Use the cursor For more information, see the electronic Operating the Calculator chapter.) The cursor, which normally rests on cursor from answer to entry through the history area. Go to the oldest or If the cursor is in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 29
    of pairs highlighted currently saved entry/answer Modifying the history area To change the number of pairs that can be saved: 1. From the calculator Home screen, press ƒ and select 9:Format. 2. Press B and use C or D to highlight the new number. 3. Press ¸ ¸. To clear the history area and delete
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 30
    on the calculator Home screen entry line. To delete an entry/answer pair, move the cursor to either the entry or answer, and press 0 or M. Working with Apps The Voyage™ 200 organizes Apps by category on the Apps desktop. To select a category, press a function key ( „ through Š). The App icons for
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 31
    Option New Description Creates a new file with the name typed in the field. Select an option, enter any required information, and press ¸. The App appears. Example: Create a new program using the Program Editor. Press Use cursor keys to highlight Result ¸ 3 ¸ DD program1 Getting Started 31
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 32
    -screen mode, press 2 K twice. To return to the last open App from the Apps desktop, press 2 a. Selecting an Apps category On the Voyage™ 200, the Apps category names appear along the left side of the Apps desktop. To select an Apps category, press the corresponding function key (displayed above the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 33
    icons for the selected category appear on the Apps desktop. Key „ All ... English † SocialSt ‡ Math ˆ Graphing ‰ Science Š Organizr Description Icons for all installed Apps displayed. Not customizable. Customizable category. English is the default. Customizable category. SocialSt (social studies
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 34
    clear the message and return to the Apps desktop. Customizing the Apps categories The Voyage™ 200 organizes your Apps into seven categories, six of which you can customize to fit your individual needs. (The All category contains every installed App and cannot be edited.) To customize the ... through
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 35
    Example: Replace the Social Studies category with the Business category and add the CellSheet and Finance App shortcuts. Press ƒ Result B 2 - or - D¸ ¤Business Getting Started 35
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 36
    Press D © B D © B ¸ † Result Getting Started 36
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 37
    screens simultaneously to see the list of functions and how they are graphed. Select the Split Screen mode from Page 2 of the MODE screen. The Voyage™ 200 displays the selected Apps in the split-screen view as shown. Split the screen horizontally (top-bottom) or vertically (left-right). Top-bottom
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 38
    of open Apps More information is available about using split screens. (For more information, see the electronic Split Screens chapter.) Checking status information Look to the status line, located at the bottom of the screen, for information about the current state of your Voyage™ 200. Getting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 39
    (RAD, DEG, GRAD) Î Exact/Approx mode Mode in which answers are calculated and displayed (AUTO, EXACT, APPROX) Ï Graph number Active of two independent graphs in splitscreen mode (GR#1, GR#2) Ð Graph mode Selected type of graph that can be plotted (FUNC, PAR, POL, SEQ, 3D, DE) Ñ Entry
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 40
    /Pause, Locked/Archived variable Meaning BUSY-Calculation or graph is in progress PAUSE-You paused a graph or program Œ-Variable opened in the current editor is locked or archived and cannot be modified Turning off the Apps desktop You can turn off the Apps desktop from the MODE dialog box. If
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 41
    Press DDBC Result ¸¸ Note: The previous open App appears (in this example, the calculator Home screen). To turn on the Apps desktop, repeat the procedure, selecting ON in the Apps Desktop mode field. To return to the Apps desktop from the calculator Home screen, press O. Using the clock Use the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 42
    box 1. Use the cursor keys to highlight the Clock icon on the Apps desktop. 2. Press ¸. The CLOCK dialog box appears with the Time Format the settings current at the time you open the dialog box, you might need to update the time before exiting. Setting the time 1. Press B to open the list of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 43
    appears. 9. Set the date (for procedures, see Setting the date). - or - To save your settings and exit, press ¸. The time is updated in the top right corner of the Apps desktop. Setting the date 1. Press C or D as required to highlight the Date Format field. 2. Press B to open the list of date
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 44
    9. Type the day, then press ¸ ¸ to save your settings and exit. The date is updated in the top right corner of the Apps desktop. Example: Set the time and date to 19/10/02 (October 19, 2002) at 1:30 p.m. Press Use cursor keys to highlight Result Time and date ¸ D1 D Getting Started 44
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 45
    Press 30D BD ¸D BD Result Getting Started 45
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 46
    Press ¸D 2002 DB Scroll down to October and press ¸ Result Getting Started 46
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 47
    Press D19 Result ¸¸ Revised time and date Turning off the clock From the Apps desktop, open the CLOCK dialog box and select OFF in the Clock field. Getting Started 47
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 48
    Example: Turn off the clock. Press Use cursor keys to highlight Result Clock on ¸ Scroll down to the Clock field. BC¸ Getting Started 48
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 49
    the procedure, selecting ON in the Clock field. Remember to reset the time and date. Using menus To select most Voyage™ 200 menus, press the function keys corresponding to the toolbars at the top of the calculator Home screen and most App screens. Select other menus using key commands. Toolbar menus
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 50
    menus Use key commands to select the following menus. These menus contain the same options regardless of the screen displayed or the active App. Press 2G 2I O 8O To display CHAR menu. Lists characters not available on the keyboard; characters are organized by category (Greek, math, punctuation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 51
    Example: Select factor( from the Algebra menu on the calculator Home screen. Press Press: Result ¹" - or - From the Apps desktop, use the cursor keys to highlight and press ¸ „ 6 indicates Algebra menu will open when you press „. 2 - or - D¸ Getting Started 51
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 52
    Selecting submenu options A small arrow symbol (ú) to the right of a menu option indicates that selecting the option will open a submenu. $ points to additional options. Example: Select ord( from the MATH menu on the calculator Home screen. Press 2I Result Getting Started 52
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 53
    Press D - or - CCB B - or - C¸ Result Using dialog boxes An ellipsis (...) at the end of a menu option indicates that choosing the option will open a dialog box. Select the option and press ¸. Getting Started 53
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 54
    variable. Press ¸ twice to save and close the dialog box. Note: Pressing the 8 S key shortcut also opens the SAVE COPY AS dialog box in most Apps. Getting Started 54
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 55
    commonly used options. Use the default custom menu or create your own using the Program Editor. You can include any available Voyage™ 200 command or character. The custom menu replaces the standard toolbar menu on the calculator Home screen. (For details on creating a custom menu, see the electronic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 56
    Example: Turn on and turn off the custom menu from the calculator Home screen. Press 2F Result Default custom menu 2F Normal toolbar menu Example: Restore the default custom menu. Getting Started 56
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 57
    Note: Restoring the default custom menu erases the previous custom menu. If you created the previous custom menu with a program, you can run the program again to reuse the menu. Press 2F (to turn off the custom menu and turn on the standard toolbar menu) Result ˆ 3 - or - DD¸ ¸ Getting Started
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 58
    desktop, use the APPLICATIONS menu to open Apps. To open the APPLICATIONS menu with the Apps desktop off, press O. Note: If you press O with the Apps desktop turned on, the Apps desktop will appear instead of the APPLICATIONS menu. Example: With the Apps desktop turned off, open the Window Editor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 59
    Using split screens The Voyage™ 200 lets you split the screen to show two Apps at the same time. For example, display both the Y= Editor and Graph screens to compare the list of functions and how they are graphed. Setting split-screen mode You can split the screen either top to bottom or left to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 60
    Press „ BD ¸ ¸ Result Getting Started 60
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 61
    -BOTTOM or LEFT-RIGHT split-screen mode, additional mode settings become available. Full-screen mode Split-screen mode Mode Split 2 App Number of Graphs Split Screen Ratio Description Lets you specify the App displayed in the bottom or right portion of the split screen. Works together with Split
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 62
    Example: Display the Y= Editor in the top screen and the Graph App in the bottom screen. Press DB Result 2 DB 4 Getting Started 62
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 63
    Result If you set Split 1 App and Split 2 App to the same nongraphing App or to the same graphing App with Number of Graphs set to 1, the Voyage™ 200 exits split-screen mode and displays the App in full-screen mode. Selecting the active App In split-screen mode, only one App can be active at a time
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 64
    graphing calculator. Adding Apps to your Voyage™ 200 is like loading software on a computer. All you need is TI Connect software and the the USB Silver Edition cable that came with your Voyage™ 200. For system requirements and instructions to link to compatible calculators and download TI
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 65
    ) numbers If you purchase software from the TI E&PS Web site or call the customer support number, you will be asked to provide information about your Voyage™ 200. You will find this information on the ABOUT screen. To display the ABOUT screen, press ƒ 3:About from the Apps desktop. The ABOUT screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 66
    displays. 6. Press ¸ to delete the application. Note: Only Flash Apps can be deleted. Connecting your Voyage™ 200 to other devices The Voyage™ 200 includes a standard I/O port. Ports are used to link two compatible graphing calculators or connect to a computer or peripheral device. In addition, any
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 67
    the included USB Silver Edition cable. To connect your calculator to another calculator - Use the an I/O unit-to-unit cable to connect the Voyage™ 200 to a compatible graphing calculator or peripheral device, such as a TI-89 or TI-92 Plus graphing calculator or the CBL 2™ and CBR™ systems. To show
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 68
    to another Voyage™ 200 using an I/O unit-to-unit cable. If you accidentally interrupt the transfer before it is complete, you will need to reinstall the OS via a computer. Again, remember to install new batteries before downloading. Please contact Texas Instruments as described in Service & Support
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 69
    during calculations. If you find yourself increasing the contrast frequently, replace the AAA alkaline batteries. The status line also gives battery information. Indicator Meaning Batteries are low. Replace batteries as soon as possible. Before replacing the batteries, turn off the Voyage™ 200
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 70
    Previews Performing Computations This section provides several examples for you to perform from the Calculator Home screen that demonstrate some of the computational features of the Voyage™ 200. The history area in each screen was cleared by pressing ƒ and selecting 8:Clear Home, before performing
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 71
    Finding the Factorial of Numbers Steps and keystrokes Display Compute the factorial of several numbers to see how the Voyage™ 200 handles very large integers. To get the factorial operator (!), press 2 I, select 7:Probability, and then select 1:!. Press 5 2 Å ¸ 20 2 Å ¸ 30 2 Å ¸ Expanding
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 72
    Finding Prime Factors Steps and keystrokes Display Compute the factors of the rational number 2634492. You can enter "factor" on the entry line by typing FACTOR on the keyboard, or by pressing „ and selecting 2:factor(. Press „ 2 2634492 d ¸ (Optional) Enter other numbers on your own. Finding
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 73
    Expanding Expressions Steps and keystrokes Display Expand the expression (xN5)3. You can enter "expand" on the entry line by typing EXPAND on the keyboard, or by pressing „ and selecting 3:expand(. Press „ 3 c X | 5 d Z 3 d ¸ (Optional) Enter other expressions on your own. Reducing Expressions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 74
    Factoring Polynomials Steps and keystrokes Display Factor the polynomial (x2N5) with respect to x. You can enter "factor" on the entry line by typing FACTOR on the keyboard or by pressing „ and selecting 2:factor(. Press „ 2 X Z 2 | 5 b X d ¸ Solving Equations Steps and keystrokes Display
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 75
    Solving Equations with a Domain Constraint Steps and keystrokes Display Solve the equation x2N2xN6=2 with respect to x where x is greater than zero. The "with" (I) operator provides domain constraint. Press „ 1 X Z 2 | 2 X | 6 Á 2 b X d 2 Í X 2 Ã 0 ¸ Solving Inequalities Steps and keystrokes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 76
    Finding the Derivative of Functions Steps and keystrokes Find the derivative of (xNy)3/(x+y)2 with respect to x. Display This example illustrates using the calculus differentiation function and how the function is displayed in "pretty print" in the history area. Press 2 = c X | Y d Z 3 e c X « Y
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 77
    of x...sin(x) with respect to x. This example illustrates using the calculus integration function. Press 2 < X p W X d b X d ¸ Solving Problems Involving Vectors Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Input a row or column of vectors. Press 2 g ? 6 b 0 b 0 2 h § d ¸2 g 4 b 0 b 2 2h § a¸ 2g?1b2b12h
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 78
    Log to Any Base Steps and keystrokes Display Find log (x,b). You can enter "log" on the entry line by typing LOG on the keyboard, or by pressing 8 7. Press 8 7 X , b d ¸ Converting Angle Measures Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Angle mode select DEGREE.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 79
    Steps and keystrokes Display 2. Convert 345 degrees to Radian angle measure. You can enter " úRad " on the entry line by selecting " úRad " from the Catalog menu, or from the Math menu by pressing 2 I and selecting 2:angle, B:úRad. Note: You can also use ó,ô, or G to override the angle mode
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 80
    Lx + 7y = L12 for y, but do not press ¸ yet. Press „ 1 ? X « 7 Y Á ? 12 b Y d 3. Use the "with" operator to substitute the expression for x that was calculated from the first equation. This gives the value of y. The "with" operator is displayed as | on the screen. Use the auto-paste feature to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 81
    the history area. Press C C C Display 5. Auto-paste the highlighted expression to the entry line. Then substitute the value of y that was calculated from the second equation. Press ¸ 2 Í C ¸ ¸ The solution is: x = L8/11 and y = L20/11 This example is a demonstration of symbolic manipulation. A one
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 82
    acceleration due to gravity, which is a constant named _g). Convert the result from newtons to kilograms of force. Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Display the MODE dialog box, Page 3. For Unit System mode, select SI for the metric system of measurements. Results are displayed according to these
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 83
    Steps and keystrokes Display 2. Create an acceleration unit for meters/second2 named _ms2. The UNITS dialog box lets you select units from an alphabetical list of categories. You can use 2 D and 2 C to scroll one page at a time through the categories. If you use the UNITS dialog box to select a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 84
    /second2 (_ms2). If you know the abbreviation for a unit, you can type it from the keyboard. Display Press 5 2 5 KG p 20 2 5 MS2 ¸ 4. Using the same m, calculate the force for an acceleration due to gravity (the constant _g). For _g, you can use the pre-defined constant available from the UNITS
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 85
    function, trace a curve, find a minimum point, and transfer the minimum coordinates to the Home screen. Explore the graphing capabilities of the Voyage™ 200 by graphing the function y=(|x2N3|N10)/2. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the Y= Editor. Press 8 # Display entry line 2. Enter the function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 86
    Steps and keystrokes 3. Display the graph of the function. Select 6:ZoomStd by pressing 6 or by moving the cursor to 6:ZoomStd and pressing ¸. Press „ 6 4. Turn on Trace. The tracing cursor, and the x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 87
    tracing cursor until the upper bound for x is just to the right of the minimum node. Press B ... B 8. Find the minimum point on the graph between the lower and upper bounds. Press ¸ 9. Transfer the result to the Home screen, and then display the Home screen. minimum point minimum coordinates
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 88
    viewing window (ZoomStd). Then use ZoomSqr to adjust the viewing window. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select FUNCTION. Press 3 B 1 ¸ Display 2. Display the Home screen. Then store the 5!r radius, 5, in variable r. Press 8 " 5 9 R ¸ 3. Display and clear the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 89
    name y1(x), not simply y1. Press ¸ ? Y 1 c X d ¸ 5. Select the ZoomStd viewing window, which automatically graphs the functions. In the standard viewing window, both the x and y axes range from L10 to 10. However, this range The mathematical endpoints of each half are (L5,0) and (5,0). Previews 89
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 90
    , however, the plotted endpoints for each half may be slightly different from their mathematical endpoints. Basic Function Graphing III Use the "Detect Discontinuities" graph format to eliminate faux asymptotes and connections in a jump discontinuity. Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Display the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 91
    order is set to sequential "Seq". Press 8 FD D D D D D B 2 ¸ 6. Execute the Graph command, which automatically displays the Graph screen. No"faux" asymptotes are present on the graph. Note: Graphing speed may slow considerably when "Detect Discontinuities" is set to ON. Press 8 %(q Previews 91
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 92
    is the maximum height of the ball and when does it hit the ground? Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select PARAMETRIC. Press 3 B 2 ¸ Display 2. Display and clear the Y= Editor. Then define the horizontal component xt1(t) = v0t cos q. Enter values for v0 and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 93
    for this example. You can press either D or ¸ to enter a value and move to the next variable. Press 8 $ 0 D 3 D .02 D ? 2 D 25 D 5 D ? 2 D 10 D 5 5. Graph the parametric equations to model the path of the ball. Press 8 % 6. Select Trace. Then move the cursor along the path to find the: • y value at
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 94
    and B=2.5. Then explore the appearance of the rose for other values of A and B. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select POLAR. For Angle mode, select RADIAN. Press 3 B 3 D D D B 1 ¸ Display 2. Display and clear the Y= Editor. Then define the polar equation r1
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 95
    Steps and keystrokes Display 3. Select the ZoomStd viewing window, which graphs the equation. • The graph shows only five rose petals. - In the standard viewing window, the Window variable qmax = 2p. The remaining petals have q values greater than 2p. • The rose
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 96
    for A and B as necessary and regraph the equation. Display Sequence Graphing A small forest contains 4000 trees. Each year, 20% of the trees will be harvested (with 80% remaining) and 1000 new trees will be planted. Using a sequence, calculate the number of trees in the forest at the end of each
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 97
    Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select SEQUENCE. Press 3 B 4 ¸ Display 2. Display and clear the Y= Editor. Then define the sequence as u1(n) = iPart(.8...u1(nN1)+1000). Use iPart to take the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 98
    Steps and keystrokes Display 5. Set the x and y Window variables to appropriate values for this example. Press 0 D 50 D 10 D 0 D 6000 D 1000 6. Display the Graph screen. Press 8 % 7. Select Trace. Move the cursor to trace year by year. How many years (nc) does it take the number of trees (yc)
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 99
    interactively change the eye Window variable values that control your viewing angle. Then view the graph in different graph format styles. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select 3D. Press 3 B 5 ¸ Display 2. Display and clear the Y= Editor. Then define the 3D
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 100
    percentages" are shown in the upper-left part of the screen. Press „ 6 Note: If you have already used 3D graphing, the graph may be shown in expanded view. When you animate the graph, the screen returns to normal view automatically. (Except for animation, you can do the same things in normal and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 101
    initial orientation. Then move the viewing angle along the "viewing orbit" around the graph. Press 0 (zero, not the letter O) A A A 7. View the graph along the x axis, the y axis, and then the z axis. Press X This graph has the same shape along the y axis and x axis. Press Y Press Z 8. Return
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 102
    Steps and keystrokes Display 9. Display the graph in different graph format styles. Press F (press F to switch from each style to the next) HIDDEN SURFACE CONTOUR LEVELS (may require extra time to calculate contours) WIRE AND CONTOUR Previews WIRE FRAME 102
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 103
    FORMATS dialog box ( 8 F). If you press F to switch between styles, the implicit plot is not displayed. Differential Equation Graphing Graph the solution to the logistic 1st-order differential equation y' = .001y...(100Ny). Start by drawing only the slope field. Then enter initial conditions in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 104
    call. Leave the initial condition yi1 blank. Note: With y1' selected, the device will graph the y1 solution curve, not the derivative y1'. Press 8 # , 8 ¸ ¸ .001 Y1 p c 100 | Y1 d ¸ 3. Display the GRAPH FORMATS dialog box. Then set Axes = ON, Labels = ON, Solution Method = RK, and Fields
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 105
    the Window Editor, and set the Window variables as shown to the right. Press 8 $ 0 D 10 D .1 D 0 D ? 10 D 110 D 10 D ? 10 D 120 D 10 D 0 D .001 D 20 5. Display the Graph screen. Because you did not specify an initial condition, only the slope field is drawn (as specified by Fields=SLPFLD in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 106
    Steps and keystrokes 8. Return to the Y= Editor and change yi1 to enter two initial conditions as a list: yi1={10,20} Press 8 # C ¸ 2 [ 10 b 20 2 \ ¸ 9. Return to the Graph screen. Press 8 % Display Previews 106
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 107
    Steps and keystrokes Display 10. To select an initial condition interactively, press: Š When prompted, enter t=40 and y1=45. When selecting an initial condition interactively, you can specify a value for t other than the t0 value entered in the Y= Editor or Window Editor. Instead of entering t and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 108
    x , 0. Draw a horizontal line across the top of the cosine curve. Then save a picture of the displayed graph. Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select FUNCTION. For Angle mode, select RADIAN. Press 3 B 1 D D D B 1 ¸ 2. Display the Home screen. Use the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 109
    4. Draw a horizontal line across the top of the cosine curve. The calculator remains in "horizontal" mode until you select a different operation or press N. Press ‰ 5 C (until the line is positioned) ¸ 5. Save a picture of the graph. Use PIC1 as the variable name for the picture. Be sure to set
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 110
    Steps and keystrokes Display 7. Open the saved picture variable to redisplay the graph with the line. Be sure to set Type = Picture. By default, it is set to GDB. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For the Graph mode, select FUNCTION. Press 3 B 1 ¸ Display Previews 110
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 111
    clear the Y= Editor. Then define y1(x) = x3 N 2x. Press 8 # , 8 ¸ ¸ X Z 3 | 2 X ¸ 3. Set the table parameters to: tblStart = M10 @tbl = 1 Graph < - > Table = OFF Independent = AUTO Press 8 & ? 10 D 1 D B 1 D B 1 ¸ 4. Display the Table screen. Press 8 ' 5. Scroll through the table. Notice that y1
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 112
    the behavior of a polynomial as its coefficients change. Steps and keystrokes 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph, select FUNCTION. For Split Screen, select LEFT-RIGHT. For Split 1 App, select Y= Editor. For Split 2 App, select Graph. Press 3 B 1 „ B 3 D B 2 D B 4 ¸ Display Previews 112
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 113
    way across the display. Press , 8 ¸ ‡ 5 ¸ .1 X Z 3 | 2 X « 6 ¸ 3. Select the ZoomStd viewing window, which switches to the Graph screen and graphs the function. The thick border is now around the Graph screen. Press „ 6 4. Switch to the Y= Editor and edit y1(x) to change .1x3 to .5x3. 2 a is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 114
    Steps and keystrokes 5. Switch to the Graph screen, which regraphs the edited function. The thick border is around the Graph screen. Press 2 a 6. Switch to the Y= Editor and open the Window Editor in its place. Press 2 a 8 $ Display 7. Open the Home screen and then exit to a full-
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 115
    one column) is automatically converted into a data variable (which can have multiple columns). Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Use O to display the Data/Matrix Editor. Create a new list variable named TEMP. Press 3 B3 D D TEMP ¸ ¸ 2. Enter a column of numbers. Then move the cursor up one cell
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 116
    Steps and keystrokes Display 3. Move to column 2, and define its column header so that it is twice the value of column 1. DATA is shown in the upper-left corner to indicate that the list variable was converted to a data variable. Œ means the cell is in a defined column. Press B † 2 p C 1 ¸ 4.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 117
    with more than 12 stories. Using Median-Median and linear regression calculations, find and plot equations to fit the data. For each 1. Display the MODE dialog box. For Graph mode, select FUNCTION. Press 3 B 1 ¸ Display 2. Use•O to display the Data/Matrix Editor. Create a new data variable named
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 118
    Steps and keystrokes Display 3. Using the sample data below, enter the population in column 1. Pop. (in 1000s) 150 500 800 250 500 750 950 Bldgs > 12 stories 4 31 42 9 20 55 73 Press 150 ¸ 500 ¸ 800 ¸ 250 ¸ 500 ¸ 750 ¸ 950 ¸ 4. Move the cursor to row 1 in column 2 (r1c2). Then enter the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 119
    column 1, the cursor can be anywhere in column 1. This example has you press 2 C so that you can see the first four rows. Press A 2 C ˆ 4 6. Display the Calculate dialog box. Set Calculation Type = MedMed x = C1 y = C2 Store RegEQ to = y1(x) Press ‡ B 7 D C1 D C2 D B D ¸ Previews 119
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 120
    to display the MedMed regression equation. As specified on the Calculate dialog box, this equation is stored in y1(x). Press ¸ 8. Close the STAT VARS screen. The Data/Matrix Editor displays. Press ¸ 9. Display the Calculate dialog box. Set: Calculation Type = LinReg x = C1 y = C2 Store RegEQ to = y2
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 121
    highlighted Plot settings. Press „ 13. Define Plot 1 as: Plot Type = Scatter Mark = Box x = C1 y = C2 Notice the similarities between this and the Calculate dialog box. Press , B 1 D B 1 D C1 D C2 14. Save the plot definition and return to the Plot Setup screen. Notice the shorthand notation for
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 122
    2 16. Scroll up to highlight Plot 1. The displayed shorthand definition is the same as on the Plot Setup screen. Press C 17. Use ZoomData to graph Plot 1 and the regression equations y1(x) and y2(x). ZoomData examines the data for all selected stat plots and adjusts the viewing window to include all
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 123
    Steps and keystrokes Display 18. Return to the current session of the Data/Matrix Editor. Press O D ¸ ¸ 19. Enter a title for column 3. Define column 3's header as the values predicted by the MedMed line. To enter a title, the cursor must highlight
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 124
    Steps and keystrokes 21. Enter a title for column 5. Define column 5's header as the values predicted by the LinReg line. Display Press B C LIN ¸ † Y2 c C1 d ¸ 22. Enter a title for column 6. Define column 6's header as the residuals for LinReg. Press B C RESID ¸ † C2 | C5 ¸ 23. Display the Plot
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 125
    and turn all the y(x) functions off. From ‡, select 3:Functions Off, not 1:All Off. Plots 2 and 3 are still selected. Press 8 # ‡ 3 27. Use ZoomData to graph the residuals. › marks the MedMed residuals; + marks the LinReg residuals. Press „ 9 28. Display the Home screen. Press 8 " Previews 125
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 126
    3) ensures that results show an integer number of buildings. After calculating the first result, edit the entry line to change y1 to y2. Press 2 I 1 3 Y1 c 300 d b 0 d ¸ B A (eight times) 0 2 ¸ Programming Write a program that prompts the user to enter an integer, sums all integers from 1 to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 127
    Steps and keystrokes 2. Type PROG1 (with no spaces) as the name of the new program variable. Display Press D D PROG 1 3. Display the "template" for a new program. The program name, Prgm, and EndPrgm are shown automatically. After typing in an input box such as Variable, you must press ¸ twice.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 128
    Steps and keystrokes Display 4. Type the following program lines. Request "Enter an integer",n Displays a dialog box that prompts "Enter an integer", waits for the user to enter a value, and stores it (as a string) to variable n. expr(n)!n Converts the string to a numeric expression. 0!temp
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 129
    result is the sum of the integers from 1 through 5. Although the Program I/O screen looks similar to the Home screen, it is for program input and output only. You cannot perform calculations on the Program I/O screen. Output from other programs may still be on the screen. Result of integer 5 Press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 130
    Steps and keystrokes Display 8. Leave the Program I/O screen and return to the Home screen. You can also press N, 2 K, or 8 " to return to the Home screen. Press ‡ Text Operations Start a new Text Editor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 131
    Editor and display the Home screen. Your text session was stored automatically as you typed. Therefore, you do not need to save the session manually before exiting the Text Editor. Press 8 " 5. Return to the current session on the Text Editor. Notice that the displayed session is exactly the same
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 132
    Numeric Solver Consider the equation a=(m2Nm1)/(m2+m1)...g, where the known values are m2=10 and g=9.8. If you assume that a=1/3 g, find the value of m1. Steps and keystrokes 1. Use Oto display the Numeric Solver. Display 2. Enter the equation. When you press ¸ or D, the screen lists the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 133
    as left-rt. If the solution is precise, left-rt=0. Press „ 0 marks the calculated values. 6. Graph the solution using a ZoomStd viewing window. The graph is displayed in a split screen. You can explore the graph by tracing, zooming, etc. The variable marked by the cursor (unknown variable m1) is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 134
    7. Return to the Numeric Solver and exit the split screen. You can press ¸ or D to redisplay the list of variables. Press 2 a ... 2 Number Bases Calculate 10 binary (base 2) + F hexadecimal (base 16) + 10 decimal (base 10). Then, use the 4 operator to convert an integer from one base to another
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 135
    Steps and keystrokes Display 2. Calculate 0b10+0hF+10. To enter a binary or hex number, you must use the 0b or 0h prefix (zero and the letter B or H). Otherwise, the entry
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 136
    result is restricted to certain size limitations. Press 3 „ (use D to move to Base mode) B 2 ¸ 7. Calculate 0b10+0hF+10. Press 0 B 10 « 0 HF « 10 ¸ 8. Change the Base mode to BIN. Press variables. Then move a variable to the user data archive memory and explore the ways in which you can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 137
    1. From the Home screen, assign variables with the following variable types. Expression: 5 !x1 Function: x2+4 !f(x) List: {5,10} !L1 Matrix: [30,25] !m1 Press 8 " M 5 9 X1 ¸ X Z2 « 4 9 F c X d ¸ 2 [ 5 b 10 2 \ 9 L1 ¸ 2 g 30 b 25 2 h 9 M1 ¸ 2. Suppose you start to perform an operation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 138
    Steps and keystrokes Display 4. Change the screen's view to show only function variables. Although this may not seem particularly useful in an example with four variables, consider how useful it could be if there were many variables of all different types. Press „ D D B 5 ¸ 5. Highlight the f
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 139
    Steps and keystrokes 8. Complete the operation. Press 2 d ¸ Display 5...f(2) Previews 139
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 140
    the , Manage toolbar menu to archive the variable. û indicates the variable is archived. Press , 8 3. Return to the Home screen and use the archived variable in a calculation. Press 8 " 6 p X1 ¸ Previews 140
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 141
    Steps and keystrokes 4. Attempt to store a different value to the archived variable. Press 10 9 X1 ¸ Display 5. Cancel the error message. Press N 6. Use VAR-LINK to unarchive the variable. Press 2 ° (use D to highlight x1) , 9 7. Return to the Home screen and store a different value to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 142
    Deleting variables Steps and keystrokes Display 1. Display VAR-LINK, and use the ‡ All toolbar menu to select all variables. A Ÿ mark indicates items that are selected. Notice that this also selected the MAIN folder. Note: Instead of using ‡ (if you don't want to delete all your variables), you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 143
    Steps and keystrokes 4. Because ‡ 1 also selected the MAIN folder, an error message states that you cannot delete the MAIN folder. Acknowledge the message. When VAR-LINK is redisplayed, the deleted variables are not listed. Press ¸ 5. Close VAR-LINK and return to the current application (Home screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 144
    On and Off You can turn your graphing calculator on and off manually by using the ´ and 2 ® (or 8 ®) keys. To prolong battery life, the APD™ (Automatic Power Down™) feature lets the calculator turn itself off automatically. Turning the Calculator On Press ´. • If you turned the unit off by
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 145
    use either of the following keys to turn off your graphing calculator. Press: Description 2 ® (press 2 and then press an error message is displayed. • When you turn the calculator on again, it displays either the Home screen or the Apps desktop (regardless of the last application you used). 8 ®
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 146
    calculation or program is in progress, unless the program is paused. If a program is retained in memory when the graphing calculator is turned off. Adjusting the Display hold 8 | or 8 « too long, the display may go completely black or blank. To make finer adjustments, hold 8 and then tap | or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 147
    batteries get low, the display begins to dim (especially during calculations) and you must increase the contrast. If you have to line Description Batteries are low. Replace batteries as soon as possible. The Voyage™ 200 Keyboard With its easy-to-hold shape and keyboard layout, you can quickly
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 148
    key commands. Í A, B, C, and D move the cursor. Î Numeric keypad performs math and scientific functions. Moving the Cursor To move the cursor in a particular direction, press the appropriate cursor key at a time. • 8 C or 8 D to move to the top or bottom of a page. Operating the Calculator 148
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 149
    characters in the entry line for editing purposes. Used with the cursor pad to manipulate geometric objects. , is also used for drawing on a graph. Note: Information is available about using ¤ and j. Examples of [2nd] and [diamond] Modifiers The N key is one of several keys that can perform
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 150
    The following Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator example shows using the 2 or 8 modifier key with the Y alphabetic key. 2  Description Displays the Y= Editor. Displays the Window Editor. Displays the Graph screen. Sets parameters for the Table screen. Displays the Table screen. Operating the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 151
    cut, copy, or paste operation. Toggles between the last two chosen Apps or between split screen portions. Toggles the custom menu on and off. Enters the "with" operator, which is used in symbolic calculations. Performs integrations and derivatives. Designates an angle in polar, cylindrical, and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 152
    Characters on the /Voyage™ 200 To: Type a single lowercase alpha character. Type a single uppercase alpha character. Type a space. Turn on lowercase alpha-lock. Press: the letter key ¤ and then the letter key (status line shows +) spacebar (no action needed) Operating the Calculator 152
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 153
    enter positive and negative numbers for your calculations. You can also enter numbers in scientific notation. Entering a Negative Number 1. Press the negation key ·. (Do not use the subtraction key |.) 2. Type the number. To see how your graphing calculator evaluates a negation in relation to other
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 154
    multiplication. • ·2«4=2 - but - | 2 « 4 subtracts 2 from the previous answer and then adds 4. Important: Use | for subtraction and use · for negation. Entering a Number in Scientific Notation 1. Type the part of the number that precedes the exponent. This value can be an expression. Operating the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 155
    not cause the answers to be displayed in scientific or engineering notation. The display format is determined by the mode settings and the magnitude of the number. Represents 123.45 × 10-2 Entering Expressions and Instructions You perform a calculation by evaluating an expression. You initiate an
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 156
    an argument. For example: ClrHome. • Some require one or more arguments. For example: Circle 0,0,5. Note: For instructions, do not put the arguments in parentheses. Notes: • The Technical Reference module describes all of the built-in functions and instructions. Operating the Calculator 156
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 157
    functions and instructions. Implied Multiplication The graphing calculator recognizes calculator interprets it as: 2ùp 4ùsin(46) 5ù(1+2) or (1+2)ù5 [a 2a] 2ùa Single variable named xy Function call Matrix order you require, use parentheses. Calculations inside a pair of parentheses are completed
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 158
    an Expression Type the expression, and then press ¸ to evaluate it. To enter a function or instruction name on the entry line, you can: • Press its key, if available. For example, press ( or Sin(. Example Type the function name in Calculate 3.76 ÷ (M7.9 + ‡5) + 2 log 45. this example. Operating the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 159
    Voyage™ 200 Press 3.76 e c · 7.9 « 2 ] 5 d d Display 3.76/( M7.9+‡( 2 ] inserts ‡( because its argument must be in parentheses. 3.76/( M7.9+‡(5)) Use d once to /( M7.9+‡(5))+2log(45) log requires ( ) around its argument. ¸ Note: You can also select log by using 2 ½ Operating the Calculator 159
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 160
    Entering Multiple Expressions on a Line To enter more than one expression or Ê instruction at a time, separate them with a colon by pressing 2 Ë. Ê Displays last result only. Ë Ë ! is displayed when line up into the history area. This highlights the last answer. Operating the Calculator 160
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 161
    to the right, 7 is displayed at the beginning of the line. 4. To return to the entry line, press N. Continuing a Calculation When you press ¸ to evaluate an expression, the graphing calculator leaves the expression on the entry line and highlights it. You can continue to use the last answer or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 162
    Voyage™ 200 Press Display 3.76 e c · 7.9 « 2 ] 5 d d ¸ « 2 LOG c 45 d ¸ When you press «, the entry line is replaced with the variable ans(1), which contains the last answer. Stopping a Calculation When a calculation is in progress, BUSY appears on the right end of the status line. To stop the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 163
    use 3 to select from three settings. Because AUTO is a combination of the other two settings, you should be familiar with all three settings. Operating the Calculator 163
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 164
    and display a floating-point result. Note: By retaining fractional and symbolic forms, EXACT reduces rounding errors that could be introduced by intermediate results in chained calculations. Operating the Calculator 164
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 165
    results, where possible, are displayed in floating-point (decimal) form. Note: Results are rounded to the precision of your graphing calculator and displayed according to current mode settings. Fractional results are evaluated numerically. Symbolic forms, where possible, are evaluated numerically
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 166
    that results are rounded to a maximum of six digits. You can use 3 to select different settings. The settings apply to all exponential formats. Operating the Calculator 166
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 167
    . Notes: • Regardless of the Display Digits setting, the full value is used for internal floatingpoint calculations to ensure maximum accuracy. • A result is automatically shown in scientific notation if its magnitude cannot be displayed in the selected number of digits. Exponential Format Mode By
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 168
    ÊË ENGINEERING 1.23456E 3 ÌÍ Description If a result cannot be displayed in the number of digits specified by the Display Digits mode, the calculator switches from NORMAL to SCIENTIFIC for that result only. 1.23456 × 104 12.3456 × 103 Ê Always 1 digit to the left of the decimal point. Ë Exponent
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 169
    the Highlight from the Previous Entry After you press ¸ to evaluate an expression, the calculator leaves that expression on the entry line and highlights it. To edit the expression, you the history area. Press N or press D until the cursor returns to the entry line. Operating the Calculator 169
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 170
    of the entry line. The first press deletes all characters to the right of the cursor, and the second clears the entry line. Operating the Calculator 170
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 171
    has both an insert and an overtype mode. By default, the calculator is in the insert mode. To toggle between the insert and overtype modes, press 2 /. If in: First, highlight the applicable characters. Then, replace or delete all the highlighted characters. Operating the Calculator 171
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 172
    you highlight characters to replace, remember that some function keys automatically add an open parenthesis. Menus To leave the keyboard uncluttered, the calculator uses menus to access many operations. This section gives an overview of how to select an item from any menu. Specific menus Operating
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 173
    useful for that application. Apps desktop or APPLICATIONS menu - functions and instructions. Also lets you select user-defined instruction, or character. The calculator includes a default custom menu, which you can modify or redefine. Refer to the Calculator Home Screen and/or the Programming
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 174
    . factor( Items Ending with 8 (Submenus) If you select a menu item ending with 8, a submenu is displayed. You then select an item from the submenu. Operating the Calculator 174
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 175
    , press D. Items Containing ". . ." (Dialog Boxes) If you select a menu item containing "..." (ellipsis marks), a dialog box is displayed for you to enter additional information. Operating the Calculator 175
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 176
    move to the next (press B) or previous (press A) toolbar menu. Pressing B from the last menu moves to the first menu, and vice versa. Operating the Calculator 176
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 177
    Ê typed round( on the entry line. Selecting an Application The graphing calculator has different applications that let you solve and explore a variety of problems. You can select an application from a menu, the Apps desktop, or you can access commonly used applications directly from the keyboard
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 178
    Apps Editor Graph Table Data/Matrix Editor Program Editor Text graph. Display graphs. Display a table of variable values that correspond to an entered function. Enter and edit lists, data, and matrices. You can perform statistical calculations and graph statistical plots. Enter and edit programs
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 179
    expression or equation, define values for all but one variable, and then solve for the unknown variable. Enter expressions and instructions, and perform calculations. From the Apps Desktop Press the first letter of the application name, or use the cursor keys to highlight an application icon on the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 180
    to refer to the application data files that you create. Use any of these methods to return to the Apps desktop from within an application: • Press O. • In full-screen mode, press 2 K. • In split To return to the last open application from the Apps desktop, press 2 a. Operating the Calculator 180
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 181
    From the Keyboard Operating the Calculator 181
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 182
    : " " 8 # 8 $ 8 % 8& 8' Applications listed above ƒ, „ etc., are printed in the same color as 8. On the Voyage™ 200, some commonly used applications are listed above the QWERTY keys. Applications Diamond key Note: 2 key functions are not shown in the above graphic. Operating the Calculator 182
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 183
    are retained by the Constant Memory™ feature when the graphing calculator is turned off. All numbers, including elements of matrices not currently valid are dimmed. For example, on Page 2, Split 2 App is not valid when Split Screen = FULL. When you scroll through the list, the cursor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 184
    the dialog box. Important: If you press N instead of ¸ to exit the MODE dialog box, any mode changes you made will be canceled. Operating the Calculator 184
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 185
    Format Pretty Print Description Type of graphs to plot: FUNCTION, PARAMETRIC, Folders to Store Independent Sets of Variables" in Calculator Home Screen. Maximum number of digits (FLOAT) or GRADIAN. Notation used to display results: NORMAL, SCIENTIFIC, or ENGINEERING. Format used to display complex
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 186
    Mode Split Screen Split 1 App Split 2 App Number of Graphs Graph 2 Split Screen Ratio Exact/Approx of the screen to display independent sets of graphs. If Number of Graphs = 2, selects the type of graph in the Split 2 part of the screen. Refer to Calculator Home Screen. Proportional sizes of the two
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 187
    on which language Flash applications are installed. Turns the Apps desktop ON or OFF. Using the Clean Up Menu to Start a New Problem On the Home screen, the Clean Up toolbar menu lets you start a new calculation from a cleared state without resetting the memory. Clean Up Toolbar Menu To display
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 188
    , you can select 1:Clear a-z before beginning the calculation. Places NewProb in the entry line. You must then press ¸ to execute the command. NewProb performs a variety of operations that let you begin a new problem from a cleared state without resetting the memory: • Clears all single-character
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 189
    an alphabetic list of all preinstalled commands (functions and instructions). Ê Ë Ì Ê Defaults to „ Built-in. Ë ƒ Help displays a command's parameters in a dialog box. Ì ... and † allow access to Flash application functions and User-Defined functions and programs. Operating the Calculator 189
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 190
    example, ... Flash Apps is dimmed if you have not installed a Flash application. † User-Defined is dimmed if you have not created a function or a program. Selecting a Built-in : Press or type: One function or program at a time D or C One page at a time 2 D or 2 C Operating the Calculator 190
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 191
    its parameters Ë Brackets [ ] indicate optional parameters From the example above, the syntax for factor is: factor(expression) - or - factor(expression,variable) required optional Operating the Calculator 191
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 192
    not display on the status line and you will see Unavailable if you press ƒ Help. Press N to exit the CATALOG Help dialog box. Selecting a Flash Application Function A Flash application may contain one or cursor as necessary before selecting the function. 1. Press: 2½ Operating the Calculator 192
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 193
    ... Flash Apps. (This programs and then use † User-Defined to access them. For instructions on how to create functions, see "Creating and Evaluating User-Defined Functions" in Calculator Home Screen, and "Overview of Entering a Function" in the Programming module. See Programming for instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 194
    necessary before selecting the function or program. 1. Press: 2½ 2. Press † User-Defined. (This option is dimmed if you have not defined a function or created a program.) • The list is alphabetized by function / program name. The left column lists functions and programs. The right column lists the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 195
    ab22 all refer to the same variable. • Cannot be the same as a name that is preassigned by the calculator. Preassigned names include: - Built-in functions (such as abs) and instructions (such as LineVert). Refer to the Technical Reference module. - System variables (such as xmin and xmax, which are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 196
    Pictures Examples 2.54, 1.25E6, 2p, xmin/10, 2+3i, (x-2)2, 2 ⁄ 2 {2 4 6 8}, {1 1 2} 100 , 100 346 "Hello", "The answer is:", "xmin/10" Functions myfunc(arg), ellipse(x,y,r1,r2) Operating the Calculator 196
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 197
    expression. 2. Press §. The store symbol (!) is displayed. 3. Type the variable name. Note: TI-89 Titanium users should use j as necessary when typing variable names. 4. Press ¸. To store to a variable Symbolic Manipulation for information about symbolic manipulation. Operating the Calculator 197
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 198
    variable name. 3. Press ¸ twice. In this example, the value stored in num1 will be inserted at the cursor position in the entry line. Operating the Calculator 198
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 199
    . It shows information about the current state of the calculator, including several important mode settings. Status Line Indicators Ê ËÌ Í ÎÏÐ Ñ Ê Current Folder Ë Modifier Key Ì Angle Mode Í Exact/Approx Mode Î Graph Number Ï Graph Mode Ð Replace Batteries Ñ History Pairs, Busy/Pause, Locked
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 200
    Approximate If the screen is split to show two independent graphs, this indicates which graph is active - G1 or G2. (Displays GR#1 or GR#2 on the Voyage™ 200.) Indicates the type of graphs that can be plotted. To change the Graph mode, use the 3 key. y(x) functions Operating the Calculator 200
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 201
    history area. Refer to History Information on the Status Line in the Calculator Home Screen module. A calculation or graph is in progress. You paused a graph or program. The variable opened in the current editor (Data/Matrix Editor, Program Editor, or Text Editor) is locked or archived and cannot be
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 202
    • If the next key you press does not have a diamond feature or an associated letter, the key performs its normal operation. Operating the Calculator 202
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 203
    instructions, evaluating expressions, and viewing results. A blank calculator Home screen This module describes the parts of the calculator Home the Calculator Home Screen When you first turn on your Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator, the Apps desktop is displayed. To display the calculator Home
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 204
    Voyage™ 200). If you turn off the Apps Desktop mode, the calculator Home screen appears automatically. Parts of the Calculator Home Screen The following example contains previously entered data and describes the main parts of the calculator operations applicable to the calculator Home screen. To
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 205
    Î Status Line Shows the current state of the calculator, including several important mode settings. Ï Last Answer Result of your last entry. Note that results are not displayed on the entry the rest of it. Note that the answer is not on the same line as the expression. Calculator Home Screen 205
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 206
    entry. Press 2 A or 2 B to go to the beginning or end of the entry the screen. You can use the history area to: • Review previous entries and answers. You can use the cursor to To: View entries or answers that have scrolled off the screen Go to the oldest or newest history pair Do this: • From the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 207
    cursor to the entry or answer. Use A and B to scroll left and right (or 2 A and 2 B to go to the beginning or end), respectively. Press N, or press D until the cursor is back on the entry line. Note: An the oldest pair is deleted. The history indicator does not change. Calculator Home Screen 207
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 208
    Home Screen Entries as a Text Editor Script To save all the entries in the history area, you can save the calculator Home screen to a text variable. When you want to reexecute those entries, use the Text Editor to open the variable as a command script. Saving the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 209
    input box such as Variable, press ¸ twice). Restoring the Saved Entries Because the entries are stored in a script format, you cannot restore them from the calculator Home screen. (On the calculator Home screen's ƒ toolbar menu, 1:Open is not available.) Instead
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 210
    Home screen. This split screen shows the Text Editor (with the command line script) and the restored calculator Home screen. Note: For complete information on using the Text Editor and executing a command script, refer to the Text Editor module. Cutting, Copying, and Pasting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 211
    of the characters. Hold ¤ and press A or B to highlight characters to the left or right of the cursor, respectively. 2. Press ƒ and select 4:Cut or 5:Copy. Calculator Home Screen 211
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 212
    the contents of the clipboard. 1. Position the cursor where you want to paste the information. 2. Press ƒ and select 6:Paste, or use the key shortcut: H 8V Calculator Home Screen 212
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 213
    the d (differentiate) function. c) Press: H 8V to paste the copied expression. d) Complete the new entry, and press ¸. Note: You can also reuse an expression by creating a user-defined function. Calculator Home Screen 213
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 214
    answer by inserting it into a new expression. Reusing the Expression on the Entry Line When you press ¸ to evaluate an expression, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator leaves that expression on the entry line and highlights it. You can type over the entry, or you can reuse it as necessary. For
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 215
    Voyage™ 200 0 § NUM ¸ NUM « 1 § NUM 2 Ë NUM Z 2 ¸ ¸ ¸ Display Note: Reexecuting an entry "as is" is useful for iterative calculations that involve variables. Using the equation A=pr2, use trial and error to find the radius of a circle that covers 200 square centimeters. Note: Editing an entry lets
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 216
    Voyage™ 200 8 § R 2 Ë 2 T R Z 2 ¸ 8 ¸ Display A 8 . 7.95 ¸ Note: When the entry contains a decimal point, the result is automatically displayed in floating-point. Effect: If the last entry is still shown on the entry line, this recalls the entry prior to that. Calculator Home Screen 216
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 217
    , 2 ` recalls this entry. If the entry line is edited or cleared, 2 ` recalls this entry. Recalling the Last Answer Each time you evaluate an expression, the Voyage™ 200 stores the answer to the variable ans(1). To insert this variable in the entry line, press 2 ±. Calculator Home Screen 217
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 218
    total of 147 tomatoes. 1. Find the area. 1.7 p 4.2 ¸ 2. Find the yield. 147 e 2 ± ¸ Variable ans(1) is inserted, and its value is used in the calculation. Just as ans(1) always contains the last answer, ans(2), ans(3), etc., also contain previous answers. For example, ans(2) contains the next-to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 219
    previous answer into the entry line. 2 ± lets you: Insert the variable ans(1), which contains the last answer only. Each time you enter a calculation, ans(1) is updated to the latest answer. Note: You can also paste information by using the ƒ toolbar menu. Auto-Pasting an Entry or Answer 1. On
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 220
    parts. Creating and Evaluating User-Defined Functions User-defined functions can be a great time-saver when you need to repeat the same expression (but with different values) multiple times. User-defined functions can also extend your Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator's capabilities beyond the built
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 221
    Format of a Function The following examples show user-defined functions with one argument and two a subsequent function or program call. Note: Function names follow the same rules as variable names. Refer to "Storing and Recalling Variable Values" in Operating the Calculator. In the argument list
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 222
    Program Editor Refer to Programming or information on creating a user-defined function. Creating a Multi-Statement Function You can also create a user in programming. Note: For information about similarities and differences between functions and programs, refer to Programming. Calculator Home
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 223
    n-1 1 When creating the definition of a multi-statement function, it may be helpful to visualize it first in a block form. Ê Func Ë Local temp,i If . Î Returns the sum. When entering a multi-statement function on the calculator Home screen, you must enter the entire function on a single line.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 224
    to include colons. Note: It's easier to create a complicated multi-statement function in the Program Editor than on the calculator Home screen. Refer to Programming. Evaluating a Function You can use a user-defined function just as you would any other function. Evaluate it by itself or include it
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 225
    Definition To: Do this: Display a list of all user-defined functions Press 2 ° to display the VAR-LINK screen as xroot), and press ¸ twice. - or - From the Program Editor, open the function. (Refer to Programming.) From the calculator Home screen, use 2 £ to display the definition. Edit the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 226
    You can view a user-defined function in the CATALOG "too tall" to be displayed completely in the history area. In other cases, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator may not be able to display an answer because there is not enough free memory. If generate a 25 x 25 matrix. Calculator Home Screen 226
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 227
    B to scroll right Ì ËÍ If There Is not Enough Memory A > symbol is displayed when the Voyage™ 200 does not have enough free memory to display the answer. For example: Note: This example uses the seq Use 2 ° as described in Memory and Variable Management. Calculator Home Screen 227
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 228
    the problem into smaller parts that can be calculated and displayed with less memory. Using the Custom Menu The Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator has a custom menu that you can turn on and off at any time. You can use the default custom menu or create your own as described in the Programming module
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 229
    ~. Commonly accented characters such as è, é,and ê. ClrHome, NewProb, and CustmOff. Note: A custom menu can give you quick access to commonly used items. The Programming module shows you how to create custom menus for the items you use most often. Restoring the Default Custom Menu If a custom menu
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 230
    later by running the program again. 3. Press ¸ to execute the commands and restore the default. Finding the Software Version and ID Number In some situations, you may need to find out information about your Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator, particularly the software version and the unit's ID
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 231
    of your unit. • If you have difficulties with your Voyage™ 200 and need to contact technical support, knowing the software version may make it easier to diagnose the problem. The About screen displays the following information about your calculator: • Hardware version • OS (Advanced Mathematics
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 232
    Ê Ë Í Ì Î Ê OS version Ë Product identifier Ì Apps certificate revision number Í Hardware version Î Unit ID (required to obtain certificates for installing purchased Apps) Your screen will be different from the one shown above. Calculator Home Screen 232
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 233
    the algebraic expression that you anticipated. How Undefined and Defined Variables Are Treated When you enter an expression that contains a variable, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator treats the variable in one of two ways. • If the variable is undefined, it is treated as an algebraic symbol. • If
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 234
    : When defining a variable, it's a good practice to use more than one character in the name. Leave one-character names undefined for symbolic calculations. Unless you knew that 5 had been stored to x previously, the answer 75 could be misleading. Determining If a Variable Is Exists Method: Enter
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 235
    Method: Use the getType function. Example: If defined, the variable's type is displayed. If undefined, "NONE" is displayed. Note: Use 2 ° to view a list of defined variables, as described in Memory and Variable Management. Symbolic Manipulation 235
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 236
    Deleting a Defined Variable You can "undefine" a defined variable by deleting it. To delete: One or more specified variables Do this: Use the DelVar function. All variables of a specific type You can also delete variables by using the VAR-LINK screen (2 °) as described in Memory and Variable
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 237
    To delete: All one-letter variables (a - z) in the current folder. Note: For information about folders, refer to the Calculator Home Screen module. Do this: From the Home screen Clean Up menu, select 1:Clear a-z. You will be prompted to press ¸ to confirm the deletion. Temporarily
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 238
    mode settings, which are described briefly in Operating the Handheld, directly affect the precision and accuracy with which the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator calculates a result. This section describes these mode settings as they relate to symbolic manipulation. EXACT Setting When Exact/Approx
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 239
    displayed in the EXACT setting. Advantages Results are exact. Disadvantages As you use more complicated rational numbers and irrational constants, calculations can: • Use more memory, which may exhaust the memory before a solution is completed. • Take more computing time. • Produce bulky results
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 240
    . If you do not plan to use symbolic computations, approximate results are similar to familiar, traditional numeric calculators. Symbolic operations such as limits and integration are less likely to give satisfying results in the APPROXIMATE setting. Approximate results are sometimes less compact
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 241
    as many solutions as possible exactly, and then use approximate numerical methods if necessary to determine additional solutions. Similarly, ä (integrate) uses approximate numerical methods if appropriate where exact symbolic methods fail. Advantages Disadvantages You see exact results when
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 242
    expression on the entry line and press ¸, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator automatically simplifies the expression according to its default of their arguments.) - If the function is a built-in or user-defined function, the function definition is applied to the simplified arguments. Then
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 243
    • Numeric subexpressions are combined. • Products and sums are sorted into order. Products and sums involving undefined variables are sorted according to the first letter of the variable name. - Undefined variables r through z are assumed to be true variables, and are placed in alphabetical order at
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 244
    • Polynomial greatest common divisors are canceled. • Polynomials are expanded unless no key cancellation can occur. • Common denominators are formed unless no key cancellation can occur. No key cancellation • Functional identities are exploited. For example: ln(2x) = ln(2) + ln(x) and sin(x)2 +
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 245
    Delayed Simplification for Certain Built-In Functions Usually, variables are automatically simplified to their lowest possible level before they are passed to a function. For certain functions, however, complete simplification is delayed until after the function is performed. Functions that Use
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 246
    Note: You may or may not want to define a numeric value for var, depending on the situation. For example: x cannot be simplified. x is not simplified. The function uses x3, and then substitutes 5 for x. Note: The example to the right finds the derivative of x3 at x=5. If x3 was initially simplified
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 247
    Substituting Values and Setting Constraints The "with" operator ( | ) lets you temporarily substitute values into an expression or specify domain constraints. Typing the "With" Operator To type the "with" operator ( | ), press: H 2Í Substituting for a Variable For every occurrence of a specified
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 248
    Values You can substitute complex values just as you would for other values. All undefined variables are treated as real numbers in symbolic calculations. To perform complex symbolic analysis, you must define a complex variable. For example: x+yi!z Then you can use z as a complex variable. You can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 249
    Note: • For an overview of complex numbers, refer to the Technical Reference module. • To get the complex i, press 2 ). Do not simply type the letter i on the keyboard. Be Aware of the Limitations of Substitutions • Substitution occurs only where there is an Only x2 was exact match for the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 250
    • Infinite recursions can occur when you define a substitution variable in terms of itself. sin(x)|x=x+1 Substitutes sin(x+1), sin(x+1+1), sin(x+1+1+1), etc When you enter a substitution that causes an infinite recursion: - An error message is displayed. - When you press N, an error is shown in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 251
    for more general expressions (either møc2=e or c2øm=e) may not work as you anticipate. Note: Use the solve function to help determine the single-variable substitution. No match for substitution Specifying Domain Constraints Many identities and transformations are valid for only a particular
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 252
    the same effect as a substitution by defining the variable. However, substitution is preferable for most cases because the variable is defined only for the current calculation and does not accidentally affect later calculations. Substituting x=1 does not affect the next
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 253
    . Caution: After x is defined, it can affect all calculations that involve x (until you delete x). Overview of the Algebra Menu You can use the „ Algebra toolbar menu to select the most commonly used algebraic functions.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 254
    in an expression and transforms the expression into a reduced ratio of a numerator and denominator. Returns an expression as a proper fraction expression. Calculates a single solution for an equation as a floatingpoint number (as opposed to solve, which may display several solutions in a rational or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 255
    Menu Item Trig Description Displays the submenu: Complex tExpand - Expands trig expressions with angle sums and multiple angles. TCollect - Collects the products of integer powers of trig functions into angle sums and multiple angles. tCollect is the opposite of tExpand. Displays the submenu:
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 256
    Menu Item Description right - Returns the right-hand side of an equation or inequality. Note: The left and right functions are also used to return a specified number of elements or characters from the left or right side of a list or character string. Common Algebraic Operations This section
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 257
    Factoring and Expanding Polynomials Use the factor („ 2) and expand („ 3) functions. factor(expression [,var]) for factoring with respect to a variable expand(expression [,var]) for partial expansion with respect to a variable Factor x5 N 1. Then expand the result. Notice that factor and expand
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 258
    Finding Partial Expansions With the expand („ 3) function's optional var value, you can do a partial expansion that collects similar powers of a variable. Do a full expansion of (x2Nx) (y2Ny) with respect to all variables. Then do a partial expansion with respect to x. Solving an Equation Use the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 259
    To see intermediate results, you can manually solve the equation step-by-step. x « y | 5 Á 2x | 5y | 2 x | y « 5 p ? 1 Note: An operation such as | 2 p subtracts 2x from both sides. Solving a System of Linear Equations Consider a set
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 260
    Method Use the simult function with a matrix. Example Enter the coefficients as a matrix and the results as a constant column matrix. Use the rref function with a matrix. Enter the coefficients as an augmented matrix. Note: The simult and rref matrix functions are not on the „ Algebra menu. Use 2
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 261
    Finding the Zeros of an Expression Use the zeros („ 4) function. zeros(expression, var) Use the expression x sin(x) + cos(x). Find the zeros with respect to x in the interval 0  x and x  3. Note: For , or , type 8 Ã or 8 Â.You can also use 2 I 8 or 2 G 2 to select them from a menu. Use the "with
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 262
    numerator and a fully expanded denominator. Notice that propFrac and comDenom perform opposite operations. Note: You can use comDenom with an expression, list, or matrix. If you do this example on your handheld, the propFrac function scrolls off the top of the screen. In this example: Symbolic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 263
    • 3---1----x----+-----6---0- is the remainder of x4N2x2+x divided by 2x2+x+4. 8 • -x--2- - -x- - 15/8 is the quotient. 24 Overview of the Calc Menu You can use the ... Calc toolbar menu to select commonly used calculus functions. The Calc Menu From the Home screen, press ... to display: This menu is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 264
    a Taylor polynomial approximation to an expression with respect to a specified variable. Calculates the numerical derivative of an expression with respect to a specified variable. Calculates an integral as a floating-point number using quadrature (an approximation using weighted sums of integrand
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 265
    the ... Calc toolbar menu. For complete information about any calculus function, refer to the Technical Reference module. Integrating and Differentiating Use the ‰ integrate (... 2) and d differentiate (... 1) functions. ‰ (expression, var [,low] [,up]) lets you specify limits or a constant of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 266
    Note: You can integrate an expression only; you can differentiate an expression, list, or matrix. Finding a Limit Use the limit (... 3) function. limit(expression, var, point [,direction]) negative number = from left positive number= from right omitted number or 0 = both Find the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 267
    the Taylor polynomial. Graph sin(x):Graph y1(x) Important: Degree-mode scaling by p/180 may cause calculus application results to appear in a different form. User-Defined Functions and Symbolic Manipulation You can use a user-defined function as an argument for the Voyage™ 200 's built-in algebra
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 268
    and Evaluating User-Defined Functions" in the Calculator Home Screen module. • "Graphing a Function Defined on the Home Screen" and "Graphing a Piecewise Defined Function" in the Calculator Home Screen module. • "Overview of Entering a Function" in the Programming module. Undefined Functions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 269
    the Calc toolbar menu, press ... 2 (or press 2 < on the keyboard). To select taylor, press ... 9. Multi-Statement vs. Single-Statement Functions Multi-statement user-defined functions should be used as an argument for numeric functions (such as nDeriv and nInt) only. Symbolic Manipulation 269
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 270
    . When: x < 0 x | 0 Use expression: Lx 5 cos(x) • If you were to create a multi-statement user-defined function with the form: Func If x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 271
    • Create an equivalent single-statement user-defined function. Use the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator's built-in when function. Then integrate y1(x) with respect to x. Note: To select ‰ from the Calc toolbar menu, press ... 2 (or press 2 < on the keyboard). Define y1(x)=when(x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 272
    digits, this uses less memory than AUTO or EXACT. For results that have only a few digits, this uses more memory.) Simplifying Problems • Split the problem into parts. - Split solve(a†b=0,var) into solve(a=0,var) and solve(b=0,var). Solve each part and combine the results. • If several undefined
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 273
    • Reformulate a problem to avoid fractional powers. • Omit relatively small terms to find an approximation. Special Constants Used in Symbolic Manipulation The result of a calculation may include one of the special constants described in this section. In some cases, you may also need to enter a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 274
    , each occurrence is numbered consecutively. After it reaches 255, arbitrary integer consecutive numbering restarts at @n0. Use Clean Up 2:NewProb to reset to @n1. Note: For @, press: H 2R Both @n and @n2 represent any arbitrary integer, but this notation identifies separate arbitrary integers
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 275
    times in the same session, each occurrence is numbered consecutively. After it reaches 255, arbitrary integer consecutive numbering restarts at @0. Use Clean Up 2:NewProb to reset to @1. Note: For @, press: H 2R Symbolic Manipulation 275
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 276
    ˆ, e ˆ represents infinity, and e represents the constant 2.71828... (base of the natural logarithms). These constants are often used in entries as well as results. Notes: For ˆ, press: H 2* For e, press: H 2s undef This indicates that the result is undefined. Mathematically undefined „ˆ (
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 277
    Constants and Measurement Units Entering Constants or Units You can use a menu to select from a list of available constants and units, or you can type them directly from the keyboard. From a Menu The following shows how to select a unit, but you can use the same general procedure to select a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 278
    Then highlight the applicable unit, and press ¸. Note: If you created a user-defined unit for an existing category, it is listed in the menu. The unit. 6.3_pF From the Keyboard If you know the abbreviation that the Voyage™ 200 uses for a particular constant or unit, you can type it directly from
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 279
    _s from the Length and Time categories, respectively. 3†9.8_m/_s Combine the units _m and _s. There is no pre-defined m/_s unit. Note: Create a user-defined unit for frequently used combinations. Constants and Measurement Units 279
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 280
    parentheses ( ) to group a value and its units so that they are evaluated properly. This is particularly true for division problems. For example: To calculate: 1---0---0----_---m--- 2_s Enter: 100_m/(2_s) 50 • _---m---_s You must use parentheses for (2_s). This is important for division. If you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 281
    from one unit to another in the same category, including any userdefined units. For All Units Except Temperature If you use a unit in a calculation, it is converted and displayed automatically in the current default unit for that category, unless you use the 4 conversion operator as described later
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 282
    If you want to convert to a unit other than the default, use the 4 conversion operator. expression_unit1 4 _unit2 For 4, press 2 4. To convert 4 light years to kilometers: 4_ltyr 4 _km To convert 186000 miles/second to kilometers/hour: 186000_mi/_s 4 _km/_hr Constants and Measurement Units 282
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 283
    If an expression uses a combination of units, you can specify a conversion for some of the units only. Any units for which you do not specify a conversion will be displayed according to your defaults. To convert 186000 miles/second from miles to kilometers: 186000_mi/_s 4 _km To convert 186000
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 284
    For Temperature Values To convert a temperature value, you must use tmpCnv( ) instead of the 4 operator. tmpCnv(expression_¡tempUnit1, _¡tempUnit2) For ¡, press 2 v" . For example, to convert 100_¡C to _¡F: tmpCnv(100_¡c, _¡f) 0 100 _oC _oF 32 212 Constants and Measurement Units 284
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 285
    example, if the default unit for Length is _m, any length result is displayed in meters (even if you entered _km or _ft in the calculation). Constants and Measurement Units 285
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 286
    If You're Using the SI or ENG/US System The SI and ENG/US systems of measurement (set from Page 3 of the MODE screen) use built-in default units, which you cannot change. The default units for these systems are available. If Unit System=SI or ENG/US, the Custom Units item is dimmed. You cannot
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 287
    4. For each category, you can highlight its default, press B, and select a unit from the list. 5. Press ¸ twice to save your changes and exit the MODE screen. You can also move the cursor by typing the first letter of a unit. Notes: • You can also use setUnits( ) or getUnits( ) to set or return
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 288
    combination of units as a single unit named _ms2. • You want to calculate how many times someone blinks. You can use _blinks as a valid unit without instance, 3_blinks is treated the same as 3a. Note: If you create a user-defined unit for an existing category, you can select it from the UNITS dialog
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 289
    Rules for User-Defined Unit Names The naming rules for units are similar to variables. • Can have up to 8 characters. • First character must be an underscore. For _, press: 2 5 •
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 290
    To calculate 195 blinks in 5 minutes as _blinks/_min: 195_blinks/(5_min) Assuming unit default for Time is set to _s. Notes: • User-defined units are displayed in lowercase characters, regardless of the case you use to define them. • User-defined units such as _dm are stored as variables. You can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 291
    Constants Description Value _c speed of light 2.99792458E8_m/_s _Cc coulomb constant 8.9875517873682E9_Nø_m2-/_coul2 _g acceleration of gravity 9.80665_m/_s2 _Gc gravitational constant 6.6742E'M11_m3/_kg/_s2 _h Planck's constant 6.6260693E'M34_Jø_s _k Boltzmann's constant 1.3806505E'
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 292
    Description Value _m0 permeability of a vacuum 1.2566370614359E'M6_N/_A2 _mb Bohr magneton 9.27400949E'M24_J ø_m2/_Wb Notes: • The calculator simplifies unit expressions and displays results according to your default units. Therefore, constant values displayed on your screen may appear
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 293
    _km kilometer _ltyr light year _m meter (SI) Area _acre _ha acre hectare _m micron _Å angstrom NONE (SI) (ENG/US) Volume _cup _floz _flozUK _gal _galUK _l cup fluid ounce British fluid ounce gallon British gallon liter _ml milliliter _pt pint _qt quart _tbsp tablespoon _tsp teaspoon
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 294
    _ms millisecond _ns nanosecond _ms microsecond Velocity _knot knot _kph kilometers per hour _mph miles per hour NONE (SI) (ENG/US) Acceleration no pre-defined units Temperature _¡C ¡Celsius (For ¡, press 2 ".) _¡F ¡Fahrenheit _¡K ¡Kelvin _¡R ¡Rankine (no default) Luminous Intensity _cd
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 295
    Amount of Substance _mol mole (no default) Mass _amu atomic mass unit _gm gram _kg kilogram (SI) _lb pound (ENG/US) _mg milligram _mton metric ton _oz ounce _slug slug _ton ton _tonne metric ton _tonUK long ton Force _dyne dyne _kgf kilogram force _lbf pound force (ENG/US) _N _tonf
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 296
    _erg _eV _ftlb erg electron volt foot-pound _kWh _latm kilowatt-hour liter-atmosphere Power _hp _kW horsepower (ENG/US) kilowatt _W watt (SI) Pressure _atm _bar _inH2O atmosphere bar inches of water _inHg inches of mercury _mmH2O millimeters of water _mmHg _Pa _psi _torr millimeters
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 297
    Viscosity, Dynamic _P poise Frequency _GHz _Hz gigahertz hertz (SI) (ENG/US _kHz _MHz kilohertz megahertz Electric Current _A ampere (SI) (ENG/US) _mA _kA kiloampere _mA milliampere microampere Charge _coul coulomb (SI) (ENG/US) Potential _kV _mV kilovolt millivolt _V _volt
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 298
    Resistance _kJ _MJ kilo ohm megaohm Conductance _mho _mmho mho (ENG/US) millimho Capacitance _F farad (SI) (ENG/US) _nF nanofarad Mag Field Strength _Oe oersted Mag Flux Density _Gs gauss _ohm _J ohm ohm (SI) (ENG/US) _siemens siemens (SI) _mmho micromho _pF picofarad _mF
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 299
    Magnetic Flux _Wb weber (SI) (ENG/US) Inductance _henry _mH henry (SI) (ENG/US) millihenry _nH nanohenry _mH microhenry Constants and Measurement Units 299
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 300
    not need to do all the steps each time you graph a function. Graphing Functions 1. Set Graph mode (3) to FUNCTION. Also set Angle mode, if necessary x and y components on Y= Editor (8 #). 3. Select (†) which defined functions to graph. Note: To turn off any stat data plots, press ‡ 5 or use † to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 301
    of the graph. • Use the ‡ Math toolbar menu to find a zero, minimum, maximum, etc. Setting the Graph Mode Before graphing y(x) functions, you must select FUNCTION graphing. You may also need to set the Angle mode, which affects how the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator graphs trigonometric functions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 302
    that use powers, such as x1/3. While this module specifically describes y(x) function graphs, the calculator lets you select from six Graph mode settings. Graph Mode Setting FUNCTION PARAMETRIC POLAR SEQUENCE 3D DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION Description y(x) functions x(t) and y(t) parametric equations
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 303
    mode and Angle mode, check the status line at the bottom of the screen. Angle Mode Graph Mode Defining Functions for Graphing In FUNCTION graphing mode, you can graph functions named y1(x) through y99(x). To define and edit these functions, use the Y= Editor. (The Y= Editor lists function names
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 304
    Press ¸ or ... to move the cursor to the entry line. 4. Type the expression to define the function. • The independent variable in function graphing is x. • The expression can refer to other variables, including matrices, lists, and other functions. Only floats and lists of floats will produce a plot
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 305
    edit it. Refer to "Editing an Expression in the Entry Line" in Operating the Calculator. - or - • Press M once or twice to clear the old expression, list now shows the edited function, which is automatically selected for graphing. Note: To cancel any editing changes, press N instead of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 306
    functions you want to graph. Shortcuts to Move the Cursor From the Y= Editor: Press: 8 C or 8D To: Go to function 1 or to the last defined function, respectively. If the cursor is on or past the last defined function, 8 D goes to function 99. From the Home Screen or a Program You can also define
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 307
    Graphing Topics. - "Overview of Entering a Function" in Programming. • Store an expression directly to a function variable. Refer to: - "Storing and Recalling Variable Values" in Operating the Calculator. - "Creating and Evaluating User-Defined Functions" in Calculator Home Screen. Note: User
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 308
    Home screen or a program. • Use the FnOn and FnOff commands (available from the Home screen's † Other toolbar menu) for functions. Refer to the Technical Reference module. • Use the PlotsOn and PlotsOff commands for stat plots. Refer to the Technical Reference module. Basic Function Graphing 308
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 309
    the Display Style for a Function For each defined function, you can set a style that specifies how that function will be graphed. This is useful when graphing multiple functions. For example, set one as a solid line, another as a dotted line, etc. Displaying or Changing a Function's Style From
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 310
    graph. Shades the area below the graph. To set Line as the style for all functions, press ‡ and select 4:Reset Styles. If You Use Above or Below Shading The Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator Home Screen or a Program You can also set a function's style from the Home screen or a program. Refer to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 311
    $ to display the Window Editor. xmin ymin ymax xscl yscl xmax Window Variables (shown in Window Editor) Corresponding Viewing Window (shown on Graph screen) Variable xmin, xmax, ymin, ymax xscl, yscl Description Boundaries of the viewing window. Distance between tick marks on the x and y axes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 312
    at every 10th pixel along the x axis. To turn off tick marks, set xscl=0 and/or yscl=0. Small values of xres improve the graph's resolution but may reduce the graphing speed. Changing the Values From the Window Editor: 1. Move the cursor to highlight the value you want to change. 2. Do any of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 313
    You can also store values directly to the Window variables from the Home screen or a program. Refer to "Storing and Recalling Variable Values" in Operating the Calculator. Changing the Graph Format You can set the graph format to show or hide reference elements such as the axes, a grid, and the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 314
    ) or hides (OFF) the x and y axes. Leading Cursor Shows (ON) or hides (OFF) a reference cursor that tracks the functions as they are graphed. Labels Shows (ON) or hides (OFF) labels for the x and y axes. Discontinuity Detection Eliminates (ON) or allows (OFF) faux asymptotes and connections in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 315
    uses the display style and viewing window that you previously defined. Displaying the Graph Screen Press 8 %. The Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator automatically graphs the selected functions. BUSY indicator shows while graphing is in progress. If you select an „ Zoom operation from the Y= Editor or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 316
    immediately, provided nothing has changed that requires regraphing. Smart Graph updates the window and regraphs only if you have: • Changed a mode setting that affects graphing, a function's graphing attribute, a Window variable, or a graph format. • Selected or deselected a function or stat plot
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 317
    and yc system variables. Rectangular coordinates use xc and yc. Polar coordinates use rc and qc. If your screen does not show coordinates, set the graph format so that Coordinates = RECT or POLAR. Press: 8F To move the free-moving cursor: To an adjoining pixel In increments of 10 pixels Press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 318
    coordinates that are on the function. • Use a Zoom operation to zoom in on a portion of the graph. Tracing a Function To display the exact coordinates of any plotted point on a graphed function, use the ... Trace tool. Unlike the free-moving cursor, the trace cursor moves only along a function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 319
    on the function, at the middle x value on the screen. The cursor's coordinates are displayed at the bottom of the screen. If multiple functions are graphed, the trace cursor appears on the lowest-numbered function selected in the Y= Editor. The function number is shown in the upper right part of the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 320
    coordinates are those of the function, not the pixel. If your screen does not show coordinates, set the graph format so that Coordinates = RECT or POLAR. Press: 8F Each displayed y value is calculated from the x value; that is, y=yn(x). If the function is undefined at an x value, the y value is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 321
    right edge of the screen, the viewing window automatically pans to the left or right. There is a slight pause while the new portion of the graph is drawn. Before automatic pan After automatic pan After an automatic pan, the cursor continues tracing. Note: Automatic panning does not work if stat
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 322
    does not regraph the screen, the cursor appears at its previous location (before you displayed the other application). Using Zooms to Explore a Graph The „ Zoom toolbar menu has several tools that let you adjust the viewing window. You can also save a viewing window for later use. Basic Function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 323
    refer to the Technical Reference module. Note: If you select a Zoom tool from the Y=Editor or Window Editor, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator automatically displays the Graph screen. Zoom Tool ZoomBox ZoomIn, ZoomOut ZoomDec ZoomSqr ZoomStd Description Lets you draw a box and zoom in on that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 324
    stat plots are in view. Adjusts the viewing window to display the full range of dependent variable values for the selected functions. In function graphing, this maintains the current xmin and xmax and adjusts ymin and ymax. Lets you store and recall Window variable settings so that you can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 325
    the zoom box. As you move the cursor, the box stretches. 4. When you have outlined the area you want to zoom in on, press ¸. The Graph screen shows the zoomed area. You can cancel ZoomBox by pressing N before you press ¸. Basic Function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 326
    2. Move the cursor to the point where you want to zoom in or out, and then press ¸. The Voyage™ 200 adjusts the Window variables by the Zoom factors defined in SetFactors. • For a ZoomIn, the x variables are the magnification and reduction used by ZoomIn and ZoomOut. Basic Function Graphing 326
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 327
    to a previous viewing window or save the current one. 1. From the „ Zoom menu, select B:Memory to display its submenu. 2. Select the applicable item. Basic Function Graphing 327
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 328
    restore the Window variables to their default values at any time. From the „ Zoom menu, select 6:ZoomStd. Using Math Tools to Analyze Functions On the Graph screen, the ‡ Math toolbar menu has several tools that help you analyze graphed functions. Basic Function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 329
    only dy/dx is available for function graphing. The other derivatives are available for other graphing modes (parametric, polar, etc.). Math functions. Finds the derivative (slope) at a point. Finds the approximate numerical integral over an interval. Finds the inflection point of a curve, where its
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 330
    in system variables xc and yc (rc and qc if you use polar coordinates). Derivatives, integrals, distances, etc., are stored in the system variable sysMath. Finding y(x) at a Specified Point 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select 1:Value. 2. Type the x value, which must be a real value between
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 331
    press ¸. The cursor moves to the solution, and its coordinates are displayed. Finding the Intersection of Two Functions within an Interval 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select 5:Intersection. 2. Select the first function, using D or C as necessary, and press ¸. The cursor moves to the next
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 332
    the cursor to the point or type its x value. 4. Press ¸. The derivative at that point is displayed. Finding the Numerical Integral over an Interval 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select 7:‰f(x)dx. 2. As necessary, use D and C to select the applicable function. Note: Typing x values is a quick
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 333
    † (ReGraph). 5. Set the upper limit, and press ¸. The interval is shaded, and its approximate numerical integral is displayed. Finding an Inflection Point within an Interval 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select 8:Inflection. 2. As necessary, use D and C to select the applicable function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 334
    move the cursor.) 7. Press ¸. The distance between the two points is displayed, along with the connecting line. Drawing a Tangent Line 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select A:Tangent. 2. As necessary, use D and C to select the applicable function. Note: To erase a drawn tangent line, press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 335
    displayed. Shading the Area between a Function and the x Axis You must have only one function graphed. If you graph two or more functions, the Shade tool shades the area between two functions. 1. From the Graph screen, press ‡ and select C:Shade. The screen prompts for Above X axis? 2. Select one of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 336
    for Above? 2. As necessary, use D or C to select a function. (Shading will be above this function.) 3. Press ¸. The cursor moves to the next graphed function, and the screen prompts for Below? 4. As necessary, use D or C to select another function. (Shading will be below this function.) 5. Press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 337
    bound. 8. Set the upper bound, and press ¸. The bounded area is shaded. To erase the shaded area, press † (ReGraph). Below function Above function Basic Function Graphing 337
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 338
    use the same general steps used for y(x) functions as described in Basic Function Graphing. Any differences that apply to polar equations are described on the following pages. Graphing Polar Equations 1. Set Graph mode (3) to POLAR. Also set Angle mode, if necessary. 2. Define x and y components on
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 339
    . For multiple equations, this helps visually distinguish one from another. 5. Define the viewing window (8 $). „ Zoom also changes the viewing window. 6. Change the graph format if necessary. ƒ9 - or - 8F 7. Graph the selected equations (8 %). Exploring the Graph From the Graph screen, you can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 340
    = POLAR before you define equations or set Window variables. The Y= Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only. You should also set the Angle mode to the units (RADIAN or DEGREE) you want to use for q. Defining Polar Equations on
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 341
    menu. Window Variables The Window Editor maintains an independent set of Window variables for each Graph mode setting (just as the Y= Editor maintains independent function lists). Polar graphs use the following Window variables. Variable qmin, qmax Description Smallest and largest q values to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 342
    = 10. yscl = 1. You may need to change the standard values for the q variables (qmin, qmax, qstep) to ensure that enough points are plotted. Setting the Graph Format To display coordinates as r and q values, use: Polar
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 343
    will be displayed as x and y. When you trace a polar equation, the q coordinate is shown even if Coordinates = RECT. Exploring a Graph As in function graphing, you can explore a graph by using the following tools. Any displayed coordinates are shown in polar or rectangular form as set in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 344
    Automatic panning is not available. If you move the cursor off the left or right side of the screen, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator will not automatically pan the viewing window. However, you can use QuickCenter. Only 1:Value, 6:Derivatives, 9:Distance, A:Tangent, and B:Arc are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 345
    , use the same general steps used for y(x) functions as described in Basic Function Graphing. Any differences that apply to parametric equations are described on the following pages. Graping Parametic Equations 1. Set Graph mode (3) to PARAMETRIC. Also set Angle mode, if necessary. 2. Define x and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 346
    . For multiple equations, this helps visually distinguish one from another. 5. Define the viewing window (8 $). „ Zoom also changes the viewing window. 6. Change the graph format if necessary. ƒ9 - or - 8F 7. Graph the selected equations (8 %). Exploring the Graph From the Graph screen, you can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 347
    or set Window variables. The Y= Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only. Defining Parametric Equations on the Y= Editor To graph a parametric equation, you must define both its x and y components. If you define only one component, the equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 348
    : tùcos(60) Instead of: tcos(60) Because: tcos is interpreted as a user-defined function called tcos, not as implied multiplication. In most cases, this refers to a nonexistent function. So the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator simply returns the function name, not a number. Note: When using t, be
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 349
    y component. For example, if you set the x component to Dot, the Voyage™ 200 automatically sets the y component to Dot. Note: Use the Animate and Path Window variables for each Graph mode setting (just as the Y= Editor maintains independent function lists). Parametric graphs use the following Window
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 350
    = 10. xscl = 1. yscl = 1. You may need to change the standard values for the t variables (tmin, tmax, tstep) to ensure that enough points are plotted. Exploring a Graph As in function graphing, you can explore a graph by using the following tools. Parametric
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 351
    tmin = 0, tmax = 2p, and tstep = p/24). Lets you move the cursor along a graph one tstep at a time. • When you begin a trace, the cursor is on the first selected of the screen, the Voyage™ 200 will not automatically pan the viewing window. However, you can use QuickCenter. Parametric Graphing 351
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 352
    : Only 1:Value, 6:Derivatives, 9:Distance, A:Tangent, and B:Arc are available for parametric graphs. These tools are based on t values. For example: • 1:Value displays x and y values for a specified t value. • 6:Derivatives finds dy/dx, dy/dt, or dx/dt at a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 353
    to SEQUENCE. Also set Angle mode, if necessary. 2. Define sequences and, if needed, initial values on Y= Editor (8 #). 3. Select (†) which defined sequences to graph. Do not select initial values. Note: To turn off any stat data plots, press ‡ 5 or use † to deselect them. 4. Set the display style
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 354
    the free-moving cursor, or of a plotted point by tracing a sequence. • Use the „ Zoom toolbar menu to zoom in or out on a portion of the graph. • Use the ‡ Math toolbar menu to evaluate a sequence. Only 1:Value is available for sequences. • Plot sequences on Time (the default), Web, or Custom axes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 355
    = SEQUENCE before you define sequences or set Window variables. The Y= Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only. Defining Sequences on the Y= Editor You can define sequences u1(n) through u99(n). Use ui only for recursive sequences, which require
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 356
    but you do not enter one, you will get an error when graphing. On the Y= Editor, Axes lets you select the axes that are used to graph the sequences. Optionally, for sequences only, you can select different axes for the graph. TIME is the default. Axes TIME WEB CUSTOM Description Plots n on the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 357
    Selecting Sequences With TIME and WEB axes, the Voyage™ 200 graphs only the selected sequences. If you entered any value. With CUSTOM axes, when you specify a sequence in the custom settings, it is graphed regardless of whether it is selected. Selecting the Display Style Only the Line, Dot, Square,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 358
    with the 2nd term in the sequence, set plotstrt = 2. The first term will be evaluated at nmin but not plotted. Incremental n value for graphing only. This does not affect how the sequence is evaluated, only which points are plotted. For example, suppose plotstep = 2. The sequence is evaluated
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 359
    plot variables to ensure that sufficient points are plotted. To see how plotstrt affects graph, look at the following examples of a recursive sequence. This graph is plotted beginning with the 1st term. plotStrt=1 This graph is plotted beginning with the 9th term. plotStrt=9 Note: Both of these
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 360
    • xmax = nmax (although you can use other values) plotStrt= nma • ymin and ymax = expected values for the sequence Changing the Graph Format The Graph Order format is not available. • With TIME or CUSTOM axes, multiple sequences are always plotted simultaneously. • With WEB axes, multiple
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 361
    window on the cursor location. • With WEB axes, the trace cursor follows the web, not the sequence. Only 1:Value is available for sequence graphs. • With TIME and WEB axes, the u(n) value (represented by yc) is displayed for a specified n value. • With CUSTOM axes, the values that correspond to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 362
    , or Custom Plots For sequences only, you can select different types of axes for the graph. Examples of the different types are given later in this module. Displaying the AXES Dialog Axes = WEB, this specifies whether a web is drawn manually (TRACE) or automatically (AUTO). Sequence Graphing 362
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 363
    dialog boxes, such as the MODE dialog box. Using Web Plots A web plot graphs u(n) vs. u(nN1), which lets you study the long-term behavior of a recursive itself. When You Display the Graph Screen After you select WEB axes and display the Graph screen, the Voyage™ 200: Sequence Graphing 363
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 364
    form for graphing. For example, consider the sequence u1(n) = 5 - u1(n - 1) and an initial value of ui1=1. The Voyage™ 200 draws the y=x reference line and then plots y = y = 5 - x . Drawing the Web After the sequence is plotted, the web may be displayed manually or automatically, depending
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 365
    the Window Editor (8 $), set the Window variables. nmin=1 nmax=25 plotstrt=1 plotstep=1 xmin=0 xmax=25 xscl=1 ymin=L10 ymax=10 yscl=1 4. Graph the sequence (8 %). u(n) By default, a sequence uses the Square display style. n 5. On the Y= Editor, set Axes = WEB and Build Web = AUTO. Sequence
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 366
    , the cursor is on the sequence. The next time you press B, nc stays the same but the cursor is now on the y=x reference line. Sequence Graphing 366
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 367
    the Window Editor (8 $), set the Window variables. nmin=0 nmax=10 plotstrt=1 plotstep=1 xmin=0 xmax=10 xscl=1 ymin=L75 ymax=10 yscl=1 4. Graph the sequence (8 %). u(n) n Because the sequence quickly diverges to large negative values, only a few points are plotted. 5. On the Y= Editor, set Axes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 368
    $), set the Window variables. nmin=1 nmax=100 plotstrt=1 plotstep=1 xmin=0 xmax=100 xscl=10 ymin=0 ymax=5 yscl=1 4. Graph the sequence (8 %). u(n) Note: Compare this graph with the divergence example. This is the same sequence with a different initial value. n 5. On the Y= Editor, set Axes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 369
    plot at a later term, the stable oscillation orbit is shown more clearly. Using Custom Plots CUSTOM axes give you great flexibility in graphing sequences. As shown in the following example, CUSTOM axes are particularly effective for showing relationships between one sequence and another. Sequence
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 370
    Example: Predator-Prey Model Using the predator-prey model in biology, determine the numbers of rabbits and foxes that and initial values for Rn and Wn. u1(n) = u1(nN1) † (1 + .05 N .001 † u2(nN1)) ui1 = 200 u2(n) = u2(nN1) † (1 + .0002 † u1(nN1) N .03) ui2 = 50 Note: Assume there are initially
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 371
    On the Window Editor (8 $), set the Window variables. nmin=0 nmax=400 plotstrt=1 plotstep=1 xmin=0 xmax=400 xscl=100 ymin=0 ymax=300 yscl=100 4. Graph the sequence (8 %). Note: Use ... to individually trace the number of rabbits u1(n) and foxes u2(n) over time (n). u(n) u1(n) u2(n) 5. On the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 372
    Using a Sequence to Generate a Table Previous sections described how to graph a sequence. You can also use a sequence to generate a table. Refer to Tables for detailed information although {1 1} is shown in the sequence list. This item is dimmed if you are not using TIME axes. Sequence Graphing 372
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 373
    3. Set Window variables (8 $) so that nmin has the same value as tblStart. 4. Display the table (8 '). Fibonacci sequence is in column 2. 5. Scroll down the table (D or 2 D) to see more of the sequence. Sequence Graphing 373
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 374
    3D equations, use the same general steps used for y(x) functions as described in Basic Function Graphing. Any differences that apply to 3D equations are described on the following pages. Graphing 3D Equations 1. Set Graph mode (3) to 3D. Also set Angle mode, if necessary. 2. Define 3D equations on
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 375
    if necessary. ƒ9 - or 8F Note: To help you see the orientation of 3D graphs, turn on Axes and Labels. 6. Graph the selected equations (8 %). Note: Before displaying the graph, the screen shows the "percent evaluated." Exploring the Graph From the Graph screen, you can: • Trace the equation. • Use
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 376
    = 3D before you define equations or set Window variables. The Y= Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only. Defining 3D Equations on the Y= Editor You can define 3D equations for z1(x,y) through z99(x,y). The Y= Editor maintains an independent
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 377
    command from the Home screen (see the Technical Reference module) to define functions and equations for any graphing mode, regardless of the current mode. Selecting the Display Style Because you can graph only one 3D equation at a time, display styles are not available. On the Y= Editor, the Style
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 378
    grid wires) intersect. The incremental value along x and y is calculated as: x increment = x---m-----a----x----------x---m-----i-n-xgrid y increment = y---m-----a----x----------y---m-----i-n-ygrid The number of contours evenly distributed along the displayed range of z values. 3D Graphing 378
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 379
    are plotted. Note: Increasing the grid variables decreases the graphing speed. Setting the Graph Format The Axes and Style formats are specific to the 3D graphing mode. Exploring a Graph As in function graphing, you can explore a graph by using the following tools. Any displayed coordinates are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 380
    „ Zoom Works essentially the same as it does for function graphs, but remember that you are now using three dimensions instead of , eyeψ) Window variables are not affected unless you select 6:ZoomStd (which resets these variables to their standard values). ... Trace Lets you move the cursor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 381
    along a 3D surface, it may not be obvious why the cursor moves as it does. 3D graphs have two independent variables (x,y) instead of one, and the x and y axes have a different orientation than other graphing modes. How to Move the Cursor On a 3D surface, the cursor always follows along a grid wire
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 382
    20 eyef=70 eyeψ=0 Note: To show the axes and their labels from the Y= Editor, Window Editor, or Graph screen, use: 8 F Simple Example of Moving the Cursor The following graph shows a sloped plane that has the equation z1(x,y) = 'M(x + y) / 2. Suppose you want to trace around the displayed boundary
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 383
    cursor may appear as if it is not on a grid point. This is an optical illusion caused when the cursor is on a hidden surface. 3D Graphing 383
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 384
    For example, consider a saddle shape z1(x,y) = (x2Ny2) / 3. The following graph shows the view looking down the y axis. Now look at the same shape at 10¡ from the x axis (eyeq = at all. This occurs when the z axis is too short to show z(x,y) for the corresponding x and y values. 3D Graphing 384
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 385
    is physically displayed at zmin or zmax (although the screen shows the correct trace coordinates). Rotating and/or Elevating the Viewing Angle In 3D graphing mode, the eyeq and eyef Window variables let you set viewing angles that determine your line of sight. The eyeψ Window variable lets you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 386
    : • eyeq - angle in degrees from the positive x axis. • eyef - angle in degrees from the positive z axis. • eyeψ - angle in degrees by which the graph is rotated counter-clockwise around the line of sight set by eyeq and eyef. Z eyef eye X Y eyeq Do not enter a ¡symbol. For example, type 20,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 387
    Effect of Changing eyeq theta The view on the Graph screen is always oriented along the viewing angle. From this point of view, you can change eyeq to rotate the viewing angle around the z axis.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 388
    on the xy plane (eyef = 90) and decrements eyef by 20 to elevate the viewing angle. Effect of Changing eyeψ psi The view on the Graph screen is always oriented along the viewing angles set by eyeq and eyef. You can change eyeψ to rotate the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 389
    eyeψ=0, the z axis runs the height of the screen. z=10 z=ë10 When eyeψ=90, the z axis runs the width of the screen. z=10 z=ë10 3D Graphing 389
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 390
    x and y axes expand or contract. From the Home Screen or a Program The eye values are stored in the system variables eyeq, eyef, and eye press 2 G and use the Greek menu. Animating a 3D Graph Interactively After plotting any 3D graph, you can change the viewing angle interactively by using the cursor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 391
    cursor quickly. Move along the viewing orbit. A or B Change the viewing orbit's elevation. C or D (primarily increases or decreases eyef) Animate the graph continuously. Press and hold the cursor for about 1 second, and then release it. To stop, press N, ¸, ´, or the space bar. Change between
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 392
    method gives you more control over the Window variable values, particularly eyeψ, which rotates the graph. Changing the Axes and Style Formats With its default settings, Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator displays hidden surfaces on a 3D graph but does not display the axes. However, you can change the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 393
    or 8 F • The dialog box shows the current graph format settings. • To exit without making a change edges of the box are determined by the Window variables xmin, xmax, etc. In many cases, the origin (0,0,0) is inside the box, not at a corner. For example, if xmin = ymin = zmin = L10 and xmax = ymax
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 394
    Note: Setting Labels = ON is helpful when you display either type of 3D axes. Examples of Style Settings Note: WIRE FRAME is faster to graph and may be more convenient when you're experimenting with different shapes. To display the valid Style settings, highlight the current setting and press B. •
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 395
    plane Looking up from below the xy plane eyeq = 20, eyef = 55, eyeψ = 0 eyeq = 20, eyef = 120, eyeψ= 0 Note: The first two examples show the graphs as displayed on the screen. The second two examples use artificial shading (which is not displayed on the screen) to show the front of the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 396
    angle is set initially so that you are viewing the contours by looking down the z axis. You can change the viewing angle as necessary. - The graph is shown in expanded view. To switch between expanded and normal view, press p. - The Labels format is set to OFF automatically. • For WIRE AND CONTOUR
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 397
    cube. If you use ZoomStd, press Z to look down the z axis. Do not confuse the contours with the grid lines. The contours are darker. 3D Graphing 397
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 398
    3.333. Five contours are drawn for z=L6.666, L3.333, 0, 3.333, and 6.666. Note, however, that a contour is not drawn for a z value if the 3D graph is not defined at that z value. 3D
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 399
    y value and press ¸. - or - • Move the cursor to the applicable point. (The cursor moves along the grid lines.) Then press ¸. For example, suppose the current graph is z1(x,y)=x2+.5y2-5. If you specify x=2 and y=3, a contour is drawn for z=3.5. Note: Any existing contours remain on the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 400
    the default contours, use 8 $ and set ncontour=0. The specified contours are drawn on the current 3D graph. (A contour is not drawn if the specified z value is outside the viewing cube or if the 3D graph is not defined at that z value.) Notes about Contour Plots For a contour plot: • You can use
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 401
    Style=WIRE FRAME. The evaluation time is much shorter. Then, after you're sure you have the correct Window variable values, display the Graph Formats dialog box and set Style=CONTOUR LEVELS or WIRE AND CONTOUR. 8 F Example: Contours of a Complex Modulus Surface The complex modulus surface given
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 402
    the zero in the fourth quadrant. The coordinates let you estimate .428-.857i as the zero. 7. Press N. Then use the cursor keys to animate the graph and view it from different eye angles. The zero is precise when z=0. This example shows eyeq=70, eyef=70, and eyeψ=0. 3D
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 403
    p to toggle between normal and expanded views. Implicit Plots An implicit plot is used primarily as a way to graph 2D implicit forms that cannot be graphed in function graphing mode. Technically, an implicit plot is a 3D contour plot with a single contour drawn for z=0 only. Explicit and Implicit
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 404
    to the right, enter the implicit form in the Y= Editor. f(x,y)-g(x,y)=0 z1(x,y)=f(x,y)-g(x,y) If x2+.5y2=30, then z1(x,y)=x2+.5y2-30. Notes: You can also graph many implicit forms if you either: • Express them as parametric equations. • Break them into separate, explicit functions. Selecting the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 405
    screen: 8 F and then set Style = IMPLICIT PLOT. Note: From the Graph screen, you can switch to the other graph format styles by pressing: F However, to return to IMPLICIT PLOT press: 8 F • IMPLICIT PLOT x2-y2=4 z1(x,y)=x2-y2-4 sin(x)+cos(y)= e(xùy) z1(x,y)=sin(x)+cos(y)-e(xùy) 3D Graphing 405
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 406
    . • You can use the cursor keys to animate the plot. • You cannot trace (...) the implicit plot itself. However, you can trace the unseen wire frame graph of the 3D equation. • It may take awhile to evaluate the equation initially. • Because of possible long evaluation times, you first may want to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 407
    )-.1 3. Press 8 $, and set the Window variables as shown. 4. Press: 8 F Turn on the axes, set Style = IMPLICIT PLOT, and return to the Window editor. 5. Press 8 % to graph the equation. It will take awhile to evaluate the graph; so be patient. The graph shows where sin(x4+y-x3y) = .1 3D
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 408
    , increase the xgrid and ygrid Window variables. However, In expanded view, this this increases the graph evaluation time. example shows eyeq=L127.85, eyef=52.86, and eyeψ=L18.26. Note: When you animate the graph, the screen changes to normal view. Press p to switch between normal and expanded views
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 409
    equations, use the same general steps used for y(x) functions as described in Basic Function Graphing. Any differences are described on the following pages. Graphing Differential Equations 1. Set Graph mode (3) to DIFF EQUATIONS. Also set Angle mode, if necessary. 2. Define equations and, optionally
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 410
    4. Set the display style for a function. Hˆ 5. Set the graph format. Solution Method and Fields are unique to differential equations. , 9 - or - H 8F Note: The Fields Fields formats, different Window variables are displayed. „ Zoom also changes the viewing window. Differential Equation Graphing 410
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 411
    EQUATIONS before you define differential equations or set Window variables. The Y= Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only. Defining Differential Equations on the Y= Editor Use t0 to specify when initial conditions occur. You can also set t0 in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 412
    as a function call. Enter: y1' = .001y1ù(100Ny1) Not: y1' = .001y1(t)ù(100Ny1(t)) Only 1st-order equations can be entered in the Y= Editor. To graph 2nd- or higher-order equations, you must enter them as a system of 1st-order equations. Detailed information is available on setting initial conditions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 413
    ) at which a differential equation is plotted. Hˆ Setting Graph Formats From the Y= Editor, Window Editor, or Graph screen, press: , 9 - or - H 8F The formats affected by differential equations are: Graph format Description Graph Order Not available. Solution Method Specifies the method used
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 414
    use it for 3rd- or higher-order. You must enter the same number of initial conditions for all equations in the Y= Editor. Important: The Fields graph format is critical in successfully graphing differential equations. Note: If you press ¸ while a slope or direction field is being drawn, the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 415
    differential equations) on the y axis. Lets you select the x and y axes. Window Variables Differential equation graphs use the following Window variables. Depending on the Solution Method and Fields graph formats, not all of these variables are listed in the Window Editor (8 $) at the same time
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 416
    be interesting visually. By setting tplot greater than t0, you can start the plot at the interesting area, which speeds up the graphing time and avoids unnecessary clutter on the Graph screen. Note: If tmax < t0, tstep must be negative. If Fields=SLPFLD, tplot is ignored and is assumed to be the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 417
    2ù(increment) © ymin + ncurvesù(increment) (Solution Method = RK only) Tolerance used by the RK method to help select a step size for solving the equation; must be ,1EL14. (Fields = SLPFLD or DIRFLD only) Number ) Point in time at which a direction field is drawn. Differential Equation Graphing 417
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 418
    to a system variable named fldpic. If you perform an operation that regraphs the plotted equations but does not affect the field, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator reuses the picture in fldpic instead of having to redraw the field. This can speed up the regraphing time significantly. fldpic is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 419
    in the Y= Editor or let the ncurves Window variable plot curves automatically, you can trace the curves. If you use: HŠ IC from the Graph screen to select initial conditions interactively, you cannot trace the curves. QuickCenter applies to all directions. If you move the cursor off the screen (top
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 420
    Tool ‡ Math For Differential Equation Graphs: Only 1:Value is available. • With TIME axes, the y(t) solution value (represented by can enter initial conditions in the Y= Editor, let the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator calculate initial conditions automatically, or select them interactively from the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 421
    y1' equation, use the yi1 line, etc. To specify when the initial conditions occur, use t0. This is also the first t evaluated for the graph. To graph a family of solutions, enter a list of initial conditions. Enter {10,20} even though {10 20} is displayed. For a 2nd- or higher-order differential
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 422
    = Custom and the x axis is t). Otherwise, a Diff Eq setup error occurs. When ncurves is used, t0 is set temporarily at the middle of the Graph screen. However, the value of t0 as set in the Y= Editor or Window Editor is not changed. Notes: • Without entering initial conditions, use SLPFLD (with
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 423
    (regardless of whether a solution curve is displayed), you can select a point on the Graph screen and use it as an initial condition. If Fields = SLPFLD - or - DIRFLD Do this: Press: Editor. A circle marks the initial condition and the solution curve is drawn. Differential Equation Graphing 423
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 424
    to enter initial conditions. t is a valid selection. It will let you specify a value for t0. Your selections will be used as the axes for the graph. • You can accept the defaults or change them. Then press ¸. • Specify an initial condition as described for SLPFLD or DIRFLD. Note: With SLPFLD or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 425
    any references to derivative values. Note: To produce a 1st-order equation, the right side must contain non-derivative variables only. y'' + y' + y = ex y'' = ex N y' N y y'' = et N y' N y Differential Equation Graphing 425
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 426
    of the equation, substitute for the derivative value as shown below. In place of: y' y'' y''' y(4) © Substitute: y1' y2' y3' y4' © y2' = et N y2 N y1 Differential Equation Graphing 426
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 427
    system. Example of a 2nd-Order Equation The 2nd-order differential equation y''+y = 0 represents a simple harmonic oscillator. Transform this into a system of equations for the Y= Editor. Then, graph the solution for initial conditions y(0) = 0 and y'(0) = 1. Differential Equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 428
    initial conditions: yi1=0 and yi2=1 Note: t0 is the time at which the initial conditions occur. It is also the first t evaluated for the graph. By default, t0=0. 5. Press: , 9 - or - H 8F and set Axes = ON, Labels = OFF, Solution Method = RK, and Fields = DIRFLD. Important: For 2nd-order equations
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 429
    variables. t0=0 tmax=10 tstep=.1 tplot=0 xmin=L2 xmax=2 xscl=1 ymin=L2 ymax=2 yscl=1 ncurves=0 diftol=.001 fldres=14 dtime=0 8. Display the Graph screen (8 %). x axis = y1 = y y axis = y2 = y' If you select ZoomSqr („ 5), you can see that the phase-plane orbit is actually a circle. However
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 430
    3 and change the mode settings on Page 2 as shown. Then close the MODE dialog box, which redraws the graph. Note: To display different graphs in both parts of a split screen, you must use the 2-graph mode. 10. Press 2 a to switch to the right side of the split screen. 11. Use † to select y1
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 431
    shows the phase-plane orbit. The right side shows the solution curve and its derivative. y' y 16. To return to a full screen of the original graph, press 2 a to switch to the left side. Then press 3 and change the Split Screen setting. Split Screen = FULL Example of a 3rd-Order Equation For
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 432
    Example 1. Press 3 and set Graph=DIFF EQUATIONS. 2. Define a system of equations for the 3rd- y''' + 2y'' + 2y' + y = order equation. Rewrite the equation and make the necessary substitutions. that only y1' is selected. Use † to deselect any other equations. Differential Equation Graphing 432
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 433
    and Fields = FLDOFF. Important: For 3rd- or higher-order equations, you must set Fields=FLDOFF. Otherwise, an Undefined variable error occurs when graphing. 7. In the Y= Editor, press: H‰ Set Axes = TIME. Note: With Axes=TIME, the solution to the selected equation is plotted against time (t). 8. In
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 434
    . Setting Axes for Time or Custom Plots Setting the axes can give you great flexibility in graphing differential equations. Custom axes are particularly effective for showing different kinds of relationships. Displaying the AXES Dialog Box From the Y= Editor, press: H‰ If Fields = SLPFLD,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 435
    Note: t is not valid for either Axis when Fields=DIRFLD. If you select t, an Invalid axes error occurs when graphing. Example of Time and Custom Axes Using the predator-prey model from biology, determine the numbers of rabbits and foxes that maintain population equilibrium in a certain region
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 436
    Predator-Prey Model Use the two coupled 1st-order differential equations: y1' = Ly1 + 0.1y1 ùy2 and y2' = 3y2 Ny1 ùy2 where: y1 = Population of foxes yi1 = Initial population of foxes (2) y2 = Population of rabbits yi2 = Initial population of rabbits (5) 1. Use 3 to set Graph = DIFF EQUATIONS. 2. In
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 437
    Window Editor (8 $), set the Window variables. t0=0 tmax=10 tstep=p/24 tplot=0 xmin=L1 xmax=10 xscl=5 ymin=L10 ymax=40 yscl=5 ncurves=0 diftol=.001 6. Graph the differential equations (8 %). Differential Equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 438
    . 9. Press: H‰ Confirm that the axes are set as shown. 10. In the Y= Editor, clear the initial conditions for yi1 and yi2. 11. Return to the Graph screen, which displays only the direction field. y2(t) y1(t) Differential Equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 439
    condition curve to another. Example Comparison of RK and Euler Consider a logistic growth model dP/dt = .001ùPù(100NP), with the initial condition P(0) = 10. Use the BldData instruction to compare the graphing points calculated by the RK and Euler solution methods. Then plot those points along with
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 440
    which the initial condition occurs. By default, t0=0. 5. Press: ,9 - or - H 8F Set Solution Method = RK and Fields = FLDOFF. Note: To speed up graphing times, clear any other equations in the Y= Editor. With FLDOFF, all equations are evaluated even if they are not selected. Differential Equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 441
    Ê Important: Change tstep from .1 (its default) to 1. Otherwise, BldData calculates too many rows for the data variable and a Dimension error occurs. 7. In 8F Set Solution Method = EULER. Note: You do not need to graph the equation before using BldData. For more information about BldData, refer to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 442
    Ê c1=rklog[1] or c1=eulerlog[1] Ë c2=rklog[2] Ì c3= eulerlog[2] 12. In the Data/Matrix Editor, press „. Then press , and define Plot 1 for the RK data, as shown to the right Y= Editor, press 3, and set Graph = FUNCTION. Plot Type=xyline Mark=Cross x=c1 y=c3 Differential Equation Graphing 442
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 443
    to see Plot 1 and Plot 2. xmin=L10 xmax=100 xscl=10 ymin=L10. ymax=120. yscl=10. xres=2. 17. Display the Graph screen (8 %). Note: The fuzzy line on the graph indicates differences between the RK and Euler values. 18. In the Window Editor, set the Window variables to zoom in so that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 444
    .8486, rounded to six digits. • The RK solution (Plot 1) is 85.8952. • The Euler solution (Plot 2) is 85.6527. You can also use the Data/Matrix Editor to open the errorlog data variable and scroll to time = 40. Example of the deSolve( ) Function The deSolve( ) function lets you solve many 1st
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 445
    as a function call. Notes: • For maximum accuracy, use 1/1000 instead of .001. A floating-point number can introduce round-off errors. • This example does not involve graphing, so you can use any
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 446
    the history area. Then press ¸ to autopaste it into the entry line. b) Insert the Define instruction at the beginning of the line. Then press ¸. Note: Press 2 A to move to the a constant. You may get a different constant (@2, etc.). For @, type @ 89 H 2R Differential Equation Graphing 446
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 447
    also use deSolve( ) to solve this problem directly. Enter: deSolve(y' = 1/1000 yù(100Ny) and y(0)=10,t,y) Troubleshooting with the Fields Graph Format If you have difficulties graphing a differential equation, this section can help you correct the problem. Many problems may be related to your Fields
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 448
    the valid Fields settings. Change to the applicable setting. • For a particular Fields setting, check the following for information that applies to that setting. Differential Equation Graphing 448
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 449
    . The selected equation must not refer to any other equation in the Y= Editor. For example: If y1'=y2, an Undefined variable error occurs when you graph. In the Graph If the slope field is drawn but no solution curve is plotted, screen specify an initial condition. Differential Equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 450
    : H‰ If Axes = TIME, an Invalid axes error occurs when you graph. If you enter initial conditions in the Y= Editor, the equations referenced select t for either axis. Otherwise, an Invalid axes error occurs when you graph. The two axes must refer to different equations in your system of equations
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 451
    ignored with DIRFLD. Default curves are not drawn automatically. With DIRFLD, the equations referenced by the custom axes determine which equations are graphed, regardless of which equations are selected in the Y= Editor. If your system of equations refers to t, the direction field (not the plotted
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 452
    equation in the Y= Editor (whether the equation is selected or not). Otherwise, a Diff Eq setup error occurs when you graph. In the Graph screen Notes If no curve is graphed, set an initial condition. If you did enter initial conditions in the Y= Editor, select ZoomFit: H „A A 1st-order equation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 453
    Differential Equation Graphing 453
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 454
    . Generating a Table 1. Set Graph mode and, if necessary, Angle mode (3). Note: Tables are not available in 3D Graph mode. 2. Define functions on on defining and selecting functions with the Y= Editor, refer to Basic Function Graphing. 4. Set up the initial table parameters (8 &). Note: You can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 455
    , you can zoom in or out on the table to see different levels of detail. • Change the cell width. • Edit selected functions. • Build or edit a manual table to show only specified values of the independent variable. Setting Up the Table Parameters To set up the initial parameters for a table, use the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 456
    for the independent variable. @tbl can be positive or negative, but not zero. Graph < - > Table If Independent = AUTO: OFF - The table is based on the same independent variable values that are used to graph the functions on the Graph screen. These values depend on the Window variables set in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 457
    Setup Parameter Description Independent AUTO - The Voyage™ 200 automatically generates a series of values for the independent variable based on tblStart, @tbl, and Graph < - > Table. ASK - Lets you build a table manually by entering specific values for the independent variable. Note: The table
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 458
    to change. 2. Specify the new value or setting. To change: tblStart or @tbl Graph < - > Table or Independent Do this: Type the new value. The existing value . From the Home Screen or a Program You can set up a table's parameters from the Home screen or a program. You can: • Store values directly
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 459
    = AUTO on the TABLE SETUP dialog box, a table is generated automatically when you display the Table screen. If Graph < - > Table = ON, the table matches the trace values from the Graph screen. If Graph < - > Table = OFF, the table is based on the values you entered for tblStart and @tbl. Before You
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 460
    First column shows values of the independent variable. Header row shows names of independent variable (x) and selected functions (y1). Other columns show corresponding values of the functions selected in the Y= Editor. Entry line shows full value of highlighted cell. Note: You can scroll back
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 461
    number of digits and symbols (decimal point, minus sign, and "í" for scientific notation) that can be displayed in a cell. All cells in the table type the number and press ¸.) 4. Press ¸ to close the dialog box and update the table. How Numbers Are Displayed in a Cell Whenever possible, a number is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 462
    • If the cell width is too narrow even for scientific notation, "..." is shown. Notes: • If a function is undefined at a particular value, undef is displayed in the cell. • Use 3 to set the display modes. By default,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 463
    If Results are Complex Numbers A cell shows as much as possible of a complex number (according to the current display modes) and then shows "..." at the end of the displayed portion. When you highlight a cell containing a complex number, the entry line shows the real and imaginary parts with a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 464
    or ¹ & to display the TABLE SETUP dialog box. Then make your changes. Building a Manual (Ask) Table If Independent = ASK on the TABLE SETUP dialog box, the Voyage™ 200 lets you build a table manually by entering specific values for the independent variable. Displaying the Table Screen To display the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 465
    the cursor to the entry line. 3. Type a new value or expression, or edit the existing value. 4. Press ¸ to move the value to the table and update the corresponding function values. Note: To enter a new value in a cell, you do not need to press .... Simply begin typing. The cursor returns to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 466
    contains existing values, they are shown as a list (which you can edit). 4. Press ¸ to move the values into the independent variable column. The table is updated to show the corresponding function values. Tables 466
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 467
    for confirmation, press ¸. Cell Width and Display Formats Several factors affect how numbers are displayed in a table. From the Home Screen or a Program System variable tbl[nput contains a list of all independent variable values entered in the table, even those not currently displayed. tbl[nput is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 468
    Tables 468
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 469
    (vector) on the Home screen or as data points in a system data variable that can be opened in the Data/Matrix Editor. Collecting the Points 1. Display the graph. (This example shows y1(x)=5ùcos(x).) 2. Display the coordinates or math results you want to collect. 3. Save the information to the Home
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 470
    or vector. Displayed coordinates are stored in a data variable named sysData, which you can open in the Data/Matrix Editor. Note: Use a split screen to show a graph and the Home screen or Data/Matrix Editor at the same time. Notes about SysData Variable • When you press: 8 D - If sysData does not
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 471
    the Home Screen In many cases, you may create a function or expression on the Home screen and then decide to graph it. You can copy an expression to the Y= Editor, or graph it directly from the Home screen without using the Y= Editor. What Is the "Native" Independent Variable? On the Y= Editor, all
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 472
    an expression from the Home screen's history area to the entry line, use the auto-paste feature or copy and paste. Define the expression as a user-defined Y= function. Define y1(x)=2x^3+3x^2N4x+12 Note: Define is available from the Home screen's † toolbar menu. Additional
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 473
    that does not correspond to the Y= Editor, such as a1 or f1(x). Graphing Directly from the Home Screen The Graph command lets you graph an expression from the Home screen without using the Y= Editor. Unlike the Y= Editor, Graph lets you specify an expression in terms of any independent variable
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 474
    or differential equations. For parametric, polar, and 3D graphs, use the following variations. In PARAMETRIC graphing mode: In POLAR graphing mode: In 3D graphing mode: Graph xExpr, yExpr, t Graph expr, q Graph expr, x, y Note: To create a table from the Home screen, use the Table command. It
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 475
    's † Other toolbar menu). - or - • Display the Y= Editor. The next time you display the Graph screen, it will use the functions selected on the Y= Editor. Extra Benefits of User-Defined Functions You can define a user-defined function in terms of any independent variable. For example: Define f1(aa
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 476
    , it may be easier to create a multistatement, user-defined function. Using the When Function To define a two-piece function, use the syntax: when(condition, trueExpression, falseExpression) For example, suppose you want to graph a function with two pieces. When: x < 0 x | 0 Use expression
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 477
    : y1(x)=when(x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 478
    Programming. A multi-statement, user-defined function can have many of the control and decisionmaking structures (If, ElseIf, Return, etc.) used in programming. When creating the structure of a function, it may be helpful enter the entire function on a single line. Additional Graphing Topics 478
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 479
    copying a function from the Home screen to the Y= Editor. From the Program Editor, you can create a user-defined function. For example, use the Program Editor to create a function named f1(xx). In the Y= Editor, set y1(x) = f1(x). Graphing a Family of Curves By entering a list in an expression, you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 480
    x) and graph the functions. Graphs three functions: 2 sin(x), 4 sin(2x), 6 sin(3x) Note: The commas are shown in the entry line but not in the function list. Example Using the Graph Command Similarly, you can use the Graph command from the Home screen or a program. Additional Graphing Topics 480
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 481
    sin(x) graph {2,4,6}sin({1,2,3}x) Simultaneous Graphs with Lists When the graph format is set for Graph Order = SIMUL, the functions are graphed in groups according to the element number in the list. For these example functions, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator graphs three
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 482
    Using the Two-Graph Mode In two-graph mode, the calculator's graph-related features are duplicated, giving you two independent graphing calculators. The two-graph mode is only available in split screen mode. For more information about split screens, refer to Split Screens. Setting the Mode Several
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 483
    top or left side • Split 2 App = application for bottom or right side • Graph 2 = Graph mode for bottom or right side • Split Screen Ratio = relative sizes of the two sides (Voyage™ 200 only) 4. Press ¸ to close the dialog box. The Two-Graph Screen A two-graph screen is similar to a regular split
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 484
    only when the two sides use different graphing modes (as described below). Independent graph-related applications (Y= Editor, Graph screen, etc.) can be displayed on both sides of the screen at the same time. Non-graph-related applications (Home screen, Data/Matrix Editor, etc.) are shared and can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 485
    different functions and stat plots (indicated by Ÿ) for each side. - If you set a display style for a function, that style is used by both sides.ˆ • Suppose Graph 1 and Graph 2 are set for function graphing. Although both sides show the same function list, you can select (Ÿ) different functions for
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 486
    side and display the application as you normally would. - or - - Use 3 to change Split 1 App and/or Split 2 App. • To exit two-graph mode: - Use 3 to set Number of Graphs = 1, or exit the split screen by setting Split Screen = FULL. - or - - Press 2 K twice. This always exits a split screen and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 487
    1, the Y= Editor lists y(x) functions. For Graph 2, the polar graph uses r(q) equations that are not shown. After the two-graph mode is set up, graph-related operations refer to the active graph side. For example: 10!xmax affects either Graph 1 or Graph 2, depending on which is active when you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 488
    , Parametric, or Polar Equation Execute DrawFunc, DrawParm, or DrawPol from the Home screen or a program. You cannot draw a function or equation interactively from the Graph screen. DrawFunc expression DrawParm expression1, expression2 [,tmin] [,tmax] [,tstep] DrawPol expression [,qmin] [,qmax
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 489
    of a Function Execute DrawInv from the Home screen or a program. You cannot draw an inverse function interactively from the Graph screen. DrawInv expression For example, use the graph of y1(x)=.1x3-2x+6 as shown above. 1. On the Graph screen, press: and select 3:DrawInv To display the Home screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 490
    example, draw a horizontal line to show that two parts of a graph have the same y value. (Some objects are not available for 3D graphs.) Clearing All Drawings A drawn object is not part of the graph itself. It is drawn "on top of" the graph and remains on the screen until you clear it. From the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 491
    Drawing a Point or a Freehand Line From the Graph screen: 1. ‰ and select 1:Pencil. 2. Move the cursor to the applicable location. To draw a: Point (pixel-sized) Freehand line Do on a black pixel, the pencil draws a white point or line (which can act as an eraser). Additional Graphing Topics 491
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 492
    a freehand line Press and hold 1, and move the cursor to erase the line. To quit, release ¤ or 1. Note: These techniques also erase parts of graphed functions. After erasing, you are still in Eraser mode. • To continue erasing, move the box cursor to another location. • To quit, press N. Drawing
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 493
    , you are still in Line mode. • To continue drawing another line, move the cursor to a new 1st point. • To quit, press N. Drawing a Circle From the Graph screen: 1. ‰ and select 4:Circle. 2. Move the cursor to the center of the circle, and press ¸. 3. Move the cursor to set the radius, and press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 494
    Drawing a Horizontal or Vertical Line From the Graph screen: 1. ‰ and select 5:Horizontal or 6:Vertical. A horizontal or vertical line and a B, etc. Drawing a Tangent Line To draw a tangent line, use the ‡ Math toolbar menu. From the Graph screen: 1. Press ‡ and select A:Tangent. Additional
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 495
    a program. Use the syntax: DrawSlp x, y, slope You can also access DrawSlp from the Graph screen. 1. ˆ and select 6:DrawSlp. This switches to the Home screen and puts DrawSlp in the entry line. 2. Complete the command, and press ¸. The calculator automatically switches to the Graph
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 496
    cursor indicates the upper-left corner of the next character you type. From the Home Screen or a Program Commands are available for drawing any of the objects described in this section. There are also commands , refer to "Drawing on the Graph Screen" in Programming. Additional Graphing Topics 496
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 497
    functions, axes, tick marks, and drawn objects. The picture does not include lower and upper bound indicators, prompts, or cursor coordinates. Display the Graph screen as you want to save it; and then: 1. Press ƒ and select 2:Save Copy As. 2. Specify the type (Picture), folder, and a unique
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 498
    you want to save. 1. H ‰ and select 8:Save Picture. A box is shown around the outer edge of the screen. Note: You cannot save a portion of a 3D graph. 2. Set the 1st corner of the box by moving its top and left sides. Then press ¸. Note: Use D and C to move the top or bottom
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 499
    . Note: If a variable name is not shown on the dialog box, there are no graph pictures in the folder. 3. Press ¸. Important: By default, Type = GDB (for graph database). Be sure to set Type = Picture. A graph picture is a drawing object. You cannot trace any curve on a picture. For Pictures Saved
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 500
    Picture Unwanted Picture variables take up calculator memory. To delete a variable, use the VAR-LINK screen (2 °) as described in Memory and Variable Management. From a Program or the Home Screen To save (store) and open (recall) a graph picture, use the StoPic, RclPic, AndPic, XorPic, and RplcPic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 501
    of pictures in quotes, such as "pic" Ë # of pictures to cycle Ì seconds between Í # of times to repeat cycle Example This example program (named cyc) generates 10 views of a 3D graph, with each view rotated 10¿¡ further around the Z axis. For information about each command, refer to the Additional
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 502
    Technical Reference module. For information about using the Program Editor, refer to Programming. Program Listing Every Other Graph from Program :cyc() :Prgm :local I :¦Set mode and Window variables :setMode("graph","3d") :70!eyef :M10!xmin :10!xmax :14!xgrid :M10!ymin :10!ymax :14!ygrid :M10!
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 503
    takes several minutes to run. After entering this program on the Program Editor, go to the Home screen and enter cyc( ). Saving and Opening a Graph Database A graph database is the set of all elements that define a particular graph. By saving a graph database as a GDB variable, you can recreate that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 504
    ¸. After typing in an input box such as Variable, you must press ¸ twice. Note: If you start from the Graph screen, be sure to use Type=GDB. Opening a Graph Database Caution: When you open a graph database, all information in the current database is replaced. You may want to store the current
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 505
    Database Unused GDB variables take up calculator memory. To delete them, use the VAR-LINK screen (2 °) described in Memory and Variable Management. From a Program or the Home Screen You can save (store) and open (recall) a graph database by using the StoGDB and RclGDB commands as described in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 506
    display Page 2. 3. Set the Split Screen mode to either of the following settings. For the procedure used to change a mode setting, refer to Operating the Calculator. Split Screen Settings TOP-BOTTOM LEFT-RIGHT Split Screens 506
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 507
    and Split 2 App to the same application, the calculator exits the split screen mode and displays the application full screen. You can open different applications after the split screen is displayed. Note: In two-graph mode, described in Additional Graphing Topics, the same application can be in both
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 508
    to "Drawing on the Graph Screen" in Programming. • Due to the border that indicates the active application, split screens have a smaller displayable area than a full screen. TI-89 Titanium: Split FULL Ratio N/A Split 1 App x y 0 - 158 0 - 76 Split 2 App x y N/A N/A Split Screens 508
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 509
    TOP-BOTTOM LEFT-RIGHT Ratio 1:1 1:1 Split 1 App x y 0 - 154 0 - 34 0 - 76 0 - 72 Split 2 App x y 0 - 154 0 - 34 0 - 76 0 - 72 Voyage™ 200: Split FULL TOP-BOTTOM LEFT-RIGHT Ratio N/A 1:1 1:2 2:1 1:1 1:2 2:1 Split 1 App Split 2 App x y x y 0 - 238 0 - 102 N/A N/A 0 - 234 0 - 234
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 510
    Method 2: Press 2 K twice to display a full-sized Home screen. When You Turn Off the Calculator Turning the calculator off does not exit the split screen mode. If the calculator is turned off: When you turn the calculator on again: When you press 2 : The split screen is still in effect, but the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 511
    Split-screen indicator Names of open Apps Split-screen indicator Names of open Apps Split screen indicator Description Top-bottom split screen • 1 indicates the application that will appear in the top portion of the screen. • 2 indicates the application that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 512
    Split screen indicator Description Left-right split screen • 1 indicates the application that will appear in the left portion of the screen. • 2 indicates the application that will appear in the right portion of the screen. The highlighted numeral indicates the active portion of the split screen.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 513
    and then „. 4. Change Split 1 App and/or Split 2 App. If you set Split 1 App and Split 2 App to the same application, the calculator exits the split screen mode and displays the application full screen. Note: In two-graph mode, described in Additional Graphing Topics, the same application can be in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 514
    that the entry line and the toolbar are always associated with the active application. For example: Entry line is for the active Y= Editor, not the Graph screen. Toolbar is for the active Graph screen, not the Y= Editor. Split Screens 514
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 515
    Note: Both Top-Bottom and Left-Right splits use the same methods to select an application. Split Screens 515
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 516
    series of items (numbers, expressions, or character strings) that may or may not be related. Each item is called an element. In the Data/Matrix Editor, a list variable: • Is shown as a single column of elements, each in a separate cell. Ê • Must be continuous; blank or empty cells are not allowed
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 517
    or index number) list1[1] ÊË Note: After creating a list in the Data/Matrix Editor, you can use the list in any application (such as the Home screen essentially a collection of lists that may or may not be related. In the Data/Matrix Editor, a data variable: • Can have up to 99 columns. • Can have
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 518
    Note: For stat calculations, columns must have the same length. From the Home screen or a program, you can use the NewData command to create a data variable that consists of Displays column 1 of the variable data1. Ë Displays element 1 in column 1 of the variable data1. Ë Data/Matrix Editor 518
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 519
    the same length. • Is initially created with 0 in each cell. You can then enter the applicable value in place of 0. From the Home screen or a program, you can use 9 to store a matrix with either of the equivalent methods shown to the right. Ê row 1 Ë row 2 Ì row 1 Í row 2 Although you enter the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 520
    . Select the folder in which the new variable will be stored. Press B to display a menu of existing folders. For information about folders, refer to the Calculator Home Screen module. Data/Matrix Editor 520
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 521
    a variable name, your calculator displays the Home screen. 4. Press ¸ (after typing in an input box such as Variable, press ¸ twice) to create and display an empty variable in the Data/Matrix Editor. Using the Current Variable You can leave the Data/Matrix Editor and go to another application at
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 522
    and columns. Opening Another Variable You can open another variable at any time. 1. From the Data/Matrix Editor, press ƒ and select 1:Open. - or - From any application, launch Data/Matrix Editor again and select 2:Open. 2. Select the type, folder, and variable to open. 3. Press ¸. Note: Variable
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 523
    variable, the values in that variable are displayed. You can then enter additional values or edit the existing ones. The Data/Matrix Editor Screen A blank Data/Matrix Editor screen is shown below. When the screen is displayed initially, the cursor highlights the cell at row 1, column 1. Ê Variable
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 524
    a new value, you can start typing without pressing ¸ or ... first. However, you must use ¸ or ... to edit an existing value. Variable Type List or data Matrix After pressing ¸, the cursor moves: Down to the cell in the next row. Right to the cell in the next column. From the last cell
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 525
    respectively. If the cursor is in or past that last row, 8 D goes to row 999. 8 C or 8 D Go to column 1 or to the last column that contains data, respectively. If the cursor is in or past that last column leave gaps between cells, your device handles the gaps automatically. Data/Matrix Editor 525
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 526
    variable. • In a data variable, gaps in a column are handled the same as a list. However, if you leave a gap between columns, that column is blank. & • In a matrix variable, when you enter a value in a cell outside the current boundaries, additional rows and/or columns are added automatically to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 527
    Changing the Cell Width The cell width affects how many characters are displayed in any cell. To change the cell width in the Data/Matrix Editor: 1. To display the FORMATS dialog box, press: ƒ 9 - or - 8 F Cell width is the maximum number of characters that can be displayed in a cell. All cells
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 528
    columns Do this: 1. Move the cursor to any cell in the column. 2. Press: ˆ and select 5:Clear Column. (This item is not available for a matrix.) Press ƒ and select 8:Clear Editor. When prompted for confirmation, press ¸ (or N to cancel). Note: For a list or data variable, a clear column is empty
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 529
    entry line and highlighted the existing definition, if any. You can also: • Press M to clear the highlighted expression. Then type the new expression. - or - Data/Matrix Editor 529
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 530
    Technical Reference module. If you refer to an empty column, you will get an error message unless Auto-calculate = OFF. 3. Press ¸, D, or C to save the definition and update the columns. ÊË Ì Ê c1=seq(x,x,1,7); Ë c2=2ùc1; Ì You cannot directly change a locked cell (Œ) since it is defined by the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 531
    you have one or more existing lists, and you want to use those existing lists as columns in a data variable. From the: Data/Matrix Editor Home screen or a program Do this: In the applicable column, use † to define the column header. Refer to the existing list variable. For example: c1=list1 Use
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 532
    use the list8mat command from the Home screen or a program. For information, refer to the Technical Reference module. The Auto-calculate Feature For list and data variables, the Data/Matrix Editor has an Auto-calculate feature. By default, Auto-calculate = ON. Therefore, if you make a change that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 533
    and on from the Data/Matrix Editor: 1. Press: ƒ 9 - or - 8 F 2. Change Auto-Calculate to OFF or ON. 3. Press ¸ to close the dialog box. If Auto-calculate = OFF and you make changes as described above, the header definitions are not recalculated until you set Auto-calculate = ON. Note: You may want
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 534
    out the top; undefined elements shift into the bottom. Note: To enter shift, type it from the keyboard or select it from the CATALOG. Data/Matrix Editor 534
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 535
    it, select it from the CATALOG, or press 2 I and select it from the List submenu. Sorting Columns After entering information in a data, list, or matrix variable, you can easily sort a specified column in numeric or alphabetical order. You can also sort all columns as a whole, based on a "key" column
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 536
    Sorting a Single Column In the Data/Matrix Editor: 1. Move the cursor to any cell in the column. 2. Press: ˆ and select 3:Sort Column. Numbers are sorted name, and test scores). In such a case, sorting only a single column would destroy the relationship between the columns. Data/Matrix Editor 536
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 537
    cursor is in a locked column, Πis shown at the beginning of the entry line. Saving a Copy of a List, Data, or Matrix Variable You can save a copy of a list, data, or matrix variable. You can also copy a list to a data variable, or you can select a column from a data variable and copy that column
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 538
    Note: A list is automatically converted to a data variable if you enter more than one column of information. Procedure From the Data/Matrix Editor: 1. Display the variable that you want to copy. 2. Press ƒ and select 2:Save Copy As. 3. In the dialog box: • Select the Type and Folder for
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 539
    . Ê List variable to copy to. Ê Ë Ë Data column that will be copied to the list. By default, this shows the column that contains the cursor. Data/Matrix Editor 539
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 540
    following pages. 1. Set Graph mode (3) to FUNCTION. 2. Enter stat data in the Data/Matrix Editor. Note: Refer to the Data/Matrix Editor module for details on entering data in the Data/Matrix Editor. 3. Perform stat calculations to find stat variables or fit data to a model (‡). 4. Define and select
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 541
    if necessary. ,9 - or - H 8F 7. Graph the selected equations (8 %). Performing a Statistical Calculation From the Data/Matrix Editor, use the ‡ Calc toolbar menu to perform statistical calculations. You can analyze one-variable or two-variable statistics, or perform several types of regression
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 542
    From the Data/Matrix Editor: 1. Press ‡ to display the Calculate dialog box. This example shows all items as active. On your calculator, items are active only if they are valid for the current settings of Calculation Type and Freq and Categories. Note: If an item is not valid for the current
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 543
    2. Specify applicable settings for the active items. Item Description Calculation Type Select the type of calculation. x Type the column number in the Data/Matrix Editor (C1, C2, etc.) used for x values, the independent variable. Y Type the column number used for y values, the dependent
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 544
    undefined data points (shown as undef) are ignored in a stat calculation. 4. To close the STAT VARS screen, press ¸. Redisplaying the STAT VARS Screen The Data/Matrix Editor's Stat toolbar menu redisplays the previous calculation results (until they are cleared from memory). H‰ Previous results are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 545
    if you leave and then reopen the Data/Matrix Editor with a data variable. • Change the current folder (if the calculation referred to a list variable in the previous folder). Statistical Calculation Types As described in the previous section, the Calculate dialog box lets you specify the statistical
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 546
    and updates all the system statistics variables. Median-Median - Fits the data to the model y=ax+b (where a is the slope, and b is the y-intercept) using the medianmedian line, which is part of the resistant line technique. Summary points medx1, medy1, medx2, medy2, medx3, and medy3 are calculated
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 547
    the data to the model equation y=axb using regression. Sinusoidal regression - Calculates the sinusoidal regression and updates all the system statistics Program Use the applicable command for the calculation that you want to perform. The commands have the same name as the corresponding Calculation
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 548
    and Variable Management. All statistical variables are cleared when you edit the data or change the calculation type. Other conditions that clear the variables are listed. Calculated Variables Statistical variables are stored as system variables. However, regCoef and regeq are treated as a list
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 549
    sum of y2 values sample standard deviation of y population std. deviation of y sum of x †y values minimum of x values maximum of x values minimum of y values maximum of y values 1st quartile median 3rd quartile regression equation regression coefficients (a, b, c, d, e) correlation coefficient ††
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 550
    median of points between minX and medStat, and 3rd quartile is the median of points between medStat and maxX. Defining a Statistical Plot From the Data/Matrix Editor, you can use the entered data to define several types of statistical plots. You can define up to nine plots at a time. Procedure From
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 551
    plot. This example shows all items as active. On your calculator, items are active only if they are valid for the (›), Cross (x), Plus (+), Square (0), or Dot (¦). x Type the column number in the Data/Matrix Editor (C1, C2, etc.) used for x values, the independent variable. y Type the column
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 552
    If you specify a Category, you can use this to limit the calculation to specified category values. For example, if you specify {1,4}, the plot Plots defined with column numbers always use the last data variable in the Data/Matrix Editor, even if that variable was not used to create the definition. •
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 553
    Setup, highlight the plot and press † to toggle it on or off. If a stat plot is selected, it remains selected when you: • Change the graph mode. (Stat plots are not graphed in 3D mode.) • Execute a Graph command. • Open a different variable in the Data/Matrix Editor. Statistics and Data Plots 553
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 554
    redefine an existing plot, you do not necessarily need to clear it first; you can make changes to the existing definition. To prevent a plot from graphing, you can deselect it. Statistical Plot Types When you define a plot as described in the previous section, the Plot Setup screen lets you select
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 555
    points are plotted and connected in the order in which they appear in x and y. You may want to sort all the columns in the Data/Matrix Editor before plotting. H ˆ 3 or ˆ 4 Statistics and Data Plots 555
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 556
    to show statistical data as a modified box plot. • Select Mod Box Plot as the Plot Type when you define a plot in the Data/Matrix Editor. A modified box plot excludes points outside the interval [Q1NX, Q3+X], where X is defined as 1.5 (Q3NQ1). These points, called outliers, are plotted individually
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 557
    each bar. • A data point at the edge of a bar is counted in the bar to the right. xmin + Hist. Bucket Width xmin • ZoomData („ 9 from the Graph screen, Y= Editor, or Window Editor) adjusts xmin and xmax to include all data points, but it does not adjust the y axis. - Use 8 $ to set ymin
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 558
    points in the traced bar Using the Y= Editor with Stat Plots The previous sections described how to define and select stat plots from the Data/Matrix Editor. You can also define and select stat plots from the Y= Editor. Statistics and Data Plots 558
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 559
    Showing the List of Stat Plots Press 8 # to display the Y= Editor. Initially, the nine stat plots are located "off the top" of the screen, above the y(x) functions. However, the PLOTS indicator provides some information. For example, PLOTS 23 means that Plots 2 & 3 are selected. To see the list of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 560
    You will see the same definition screen that is displayed in the Data/Matrix Editor. Highlight the plot and press †. Press ‡ and select the applicable plot. To Graph Plots and Y= Functions As necessary, you can select and graph stat plots and y(x) functions at the same time. Graphing and Tracing
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 561
    Defining the Viewing Window Stat plots are displayed on the current graph, and they use the Window variables that are defined in the Window Editor. Use 8 $ to display the the value for ymax. Note: „ Zoom is available on the Y= Editor, Window Editor, and Graph screen. Statistics and Data Plots 561
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 562
    Q3 and maxX. The cursor moves from the top center of each bar, starting from the leftmost bar. Note: When a stat plot is displayed, the Graph screen does not automatically pan if you trace off the left or right side of the screen. However, you can still press ¸ to center the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 563
    of a Frequency Column In a data variable, you can use any column in the Data/Matrix Editor to specify a frequency value (or weight) for the data points on each row. A frequency value must be an integer , 0 if Calculation Type = OneVar or MedMed or if Plot Type = Box Plot. For other statistical
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 564
    c1 85 97 92 Ê 92 Ê 89 91 95 Ë 95 Ë 95 Ë Ê Frequency of 2 Ë Frequency of 3 Note: A frequency value of 0 effectively removes the data point from analysis. To use frequency values, specify the frequency column when you perform a statistical calculation or define a stat plot. For example: Statistics
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 565
    Set this to YES. Type the column number (or list name) that contains the frequency values. Note: You can also use frequency values from a list variable instead of a column. Example of a Category Column In a data variable, you can use any column to specify a category (or subset) value for the data
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 566
    In the Data/Matrix Editor, you can enter the scores and the category values in two columns. 4 3 1 To use category values, specify the category column and the category values to include in the analysis when you perform a statistical calculation or define a stat plot. Statistics and Data Plots 566
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 567
    Set this to YES. Type the column number (or list name) that contains the category values. Within braces { }, type the category values to use, separated by commas. (Do not type a column number or list name.) Note: You can also use category values from a list variable instead of a column. To analyze
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 568
    Laboratory™ System (CBL 2) and Calculator-Based Ranger™ System (CBR) are optional accessories, available separately, that let you collect data from a variety of real-world experiments. Voyage™ 200, CBL 2 and CBR programs are available from the TI web site at education.ti.com. How CBL 2™ Data Is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 569
    Note: For specifics about using the CBL 2 and retrieving data to the Voyage™ 200, refer to the guidebook that comes with the CBL 2 unit. Referring to the CBL 2™ Lists When you perform a statistical calculation or define a plot, you can refer explicitly to the CBL 2 list variables. For example: Type
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 570
    • From the Home screen or a program, use the NewData command. NewData dataVar, list1 [,list2 ] [, information, refer to the Data/Matrix Editor module. At this point, the columns are linked to the CBL 2 lists. If the lists are changed, the columns will be updated automatically. However, if the lists
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 571
    CBR™ You can also use the Calculator-Based Ranger™ (CBR) to explore the mathematical and scientific relationships between distance, velocity, acceleration, and time using data collected from activities you perform. Statistics and Data Plots 571
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 572
    of this module), you can run it from the Home screen. The program's output, if any, is displayed on the Program I/O screen, in a dialog box, or on the Graph screen. Running a Program On the Home screen: 1. Type the name of the program. 2. You must always type a set of parentheses after the name
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 573
    Note: Arguments specify initial values for a program. When you run a program, the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator automatically checks for errors. For example, the following message is displayed if you: • Do not enter ( ) after the program name. This error message appears if you: • Do not enter
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 574
    information on the applicable screen. • Most output and input commands use the Program I/O screen. (Input commands prompt the user to enter information.) • Graph-related commands typically use the Graph screen. After the program stops, the Voyage™ 200 shows the last screen that was displayed. The
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 575
    to display output or to prompt the user for input. You cannot perform calculations on this screen. Note: If Home screen calculations don't work after you run a program, you may be on the Program I/O screen. Leaving the Program I/O Screen From the Program I/O screen: • Press ‡ to toggle between the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 576
    . 3. Specify the applicable information for the new program or function. Item Type Folder Lets you: Select whether to create a new program or function. Select the folder in which the new program or function will be stored. For information about folders, refer to the Calculator Home Screen module
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 577
    (or function) is saved automatically as you type. You do not need to save it manually before leaving the Program Editor, starting a new program, or opening a previous one. Resuming the Current Program You can leave the Program Editor and go to another application at any time. To return to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 578
    3:New. 2. Specify the type, folder, and variable for the new program or function. 3. Press ¸ twice. Opening a Previous Program You can open a previously created program or function at any time. 1. From within the Program Editor, press ƒ and select 1:Open. - or - From another application, launch
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 579
    about VAR-LINK, refer to the Memory and Variable Management module. Overview of Entering a Program A program is a series of commands executed in sequential order (although some commands alter the program flow). In general, anything that can be executed from the Home screen can be included
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 580
    begin with a colon. Note: Use the cursor pad to scroll through the program for entering or editing commands. Use 8 C or 8 D to go to the top or bottom of a program, respectively. You enter and edit program commands in the Program Editor by using the same techniques used to enter and edit text in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 581
    comments to enter information that is useful to someone reading the program code. To enter the comment symbol, press: • 2X - or - • Press „ and select 9:¦ Controlling the Flow of a Program When you run a program, the program lines are executed in sequential order. However, some commands alter the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 582
    unless you use an output command. This is an important difference between performing a calculation on the Home screen and in a program. These calculations will not display a result in a program (although they will on the Home screen). :12ù6 :cos(p/4) :solve(x^2-x-2=0,x) Output commands such
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 583
    Displaying a calculation result does not store that result. If you need to refer to a result later, store it to a variable. :cos(p/4)!maximum :Disp maximum Note: A list of output commands is available. Getting Values into a Program To input values into a program, you can: • Require the users to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 584
    name, specify the variables that will be used to store the passed values. Notice that the program also contains commands that set up the Graph screen. :circ(x,y,r) Ê :Prgm :FnOff :ZoomStd :ZoomSqr :Circle x,y,r :LineHorz y+r :EndPrgm Ê Only circ( ) is initially displayed on the blank template
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 585
    of Entering a Function A function created in the Program Editor is very similar to the functions and instructions that you typically use from the Home screen. Why Create a User-Defined Function? Functions (as well as programs) are ideal for repetitive calculations or tasks. You only need to write
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 586
    that expand on the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator's built-in functions. You can then use the new functions the same as any other function. • Functions return values that can be graphed or entered in a table; programs cannot. • You can use a function (but not a program) within an expression. For
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 587
    in TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 user-defined function. • Cannot define a program. • Cannot define a global function, but it can define a local function. Note: Information about local variables is available. Entering a Function When you create a new function in the Program Editor, the Voyage™ 200
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 588
    , and it cannot use instructions that prompt the user for input.) How to Return a Value from a Function There are two ways to return a value from a function: • As the last line in the function :cube(x) (before EndFunc), calculate the :Func value to be returned. :x^3 :EndFunc Programming 588
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 589
    other than :If x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 590
    !y 20 5 :xroot(x,y) :Func :y^(1/x) :EndFunc Calling One Program from Another One program can call another program as a subroutine. The subroutine can be external (a separate program) or internal (included in the main program). Subroutines are useful when a program needs to repeat the same group of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 591
    , use the same syntax used to run the program from the Home screen. :subtest1() :Prgm :For i,1,4,1 : subtest2(i,iù1000) :EndFor :EndPrgm :subtest2(x,y) :Prgm : Disp x,y :EndPrgm can be called, it is a good practice to define subroutines at the beginning of the main program. Programming 591
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 592
    † Var toolbar menu to enter the Define and Prgm...EndPrgm commands. Notes about Using Subroutines At the end of a subroutine, execution returns to the calling program. To exit a subroutine at any other time, use the Return command. A subroutine cannot access local variables declared in the calling
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 593
    that are created Variables automatically to store data about the state of the calculator. For example, Window variables (xmin, xmax, ymin, ymax, etc.) name only, regardless of the current folder. • A program cannot create system variables, but it can use the values and (in most cases) store
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 594
    a variable in another folder, you must specify a path name. For example: 5!class\start (class = Variable name; start = Folder Name) After the program stops, any folder variables created by the program still exist and still take up memory. Local Variables Temporary variables that exist only while
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 595
    function cannot access them. For example: Local a 5!a Graph aùcos(x) may display an error or an unexpected result (if a is an existing variable in the current folder). Circular Definition Errors When evaluating a user-defined function or running a program, you can specify an argument that includes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 596
    variables from RAM to user data archive memory. Lets you create a data variable based on the graph information entered in the Y= Editor, Window Editor, etc. Copies the contents of a variable. Defines a program (subroutine) or function variable within a program. Deletes a folder. All variables
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 597
    new folder. Creates a picture variable based on a matrix. Renames a variable. Moves specified variables from user data archive memory to RAM. Unlocks a locked variable. Note: The Define, DelVar, and Local commands are available from the Program Editor's † Var toolbar menu. Using Local Variables in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 598
    up memory. What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message? An Undefined variable error message displays when you evaluate a user-defined function or run a user-defined program that references a local variable that is not initialized (assigned a value). This example is a multi-statement function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 599
    be assigned an initial value before they are referenced. Define fact(n)=Func: Ê Local m: 1!m: While n>1: nùm!m: n-1!n: EndWhile: Return m: EndFunc Ê 1 is stored as the initial value for m. The calculator cannot use a local variable to perform symbolic calculations. Programming 599
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 600
    If you want a function or program to perform symbolic calculations, you must use a global variable instead of a local. However, you must be certain that the global variable does not already exist outside of the program. The following methods can help. • Refer to a global variable name, typically
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 601
    How Strings Are Used A string is a sequence of characters enclosed in "quotes." In programming, strings allow the program to display information or prompt the user to perform some action. For example: Disp "The result is",answer - or - Input "Enter the angle in degrees",ang1 - or - "Enter the angle
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 602
    expression. This is the opposite of the string command. Important: Some user input commands store the entered value as a string. Before you expression as a character string based on the format template (fixed, scientific, engineering, etc.) Searches a string to see if it contains . Programming 602
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 603
    into a string. This is the opposite of the expr command. Conditional Tests Conditional tests let programs make decisions. For example, depending on whether a test is true or false, a program can decide which of two actions to perform. Conditional tests are used with control structures such as
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 604
    if: Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to Equal Not equal to Example a>8 a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 605
    false if x>2 Note: If you use not from the Home screen, it is shown as ~ in the history area. For example, not x>2 is shown as ~(x>2). Programming 605
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 606
    . Lbl (label) and Goto commands can also be used to branch (or jump) from one place to another in a program. F2 Control Toolbar Menu To enter If...EndIf structures, use the Program Editor's „ Control toolbar menu. The If command is available directly from the „ menu. To see a submenu that lists
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 607
    Always displays the value of x. In this example, you must store a value to x before executing the If command. Note: Use indentation to make your programs easier to read and understand. If...Then...EndIf Structures To execute one group of commands if a conditional test is true, use the structure: :If
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 608
    x>5 • 5x if x{5 If...Then...ElseIf... EndIf Structures A more complex form of the If command lets you test a series of conditions. Suppose your program prompts the user for a number that corresponds to one of four options. To test for each option (If Choice=1, If Choice = 2, etc.), use the If...Then
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 609
    and an example. Lbl and Goto Commands You can also control the flow of your program by using Lbl (label) and Goto commands. Use the Lbl command to label (assign a name to) a particular location in the program. Lbl labelName name to assign to this location (use the same naming convention as
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 610
    test. For example: :If x>5 Ê : Goto GT5 Ë :Disp x Lbl GT5 :Disp "The number was > 5" Ê If x>5, branches directly to label GT5. Ë For this example, the program must include commands (such as Stop) that prevent Lbl GT5 from being executed if x{5. Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands To repeat
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 611
    used the first time For is executed Ì exits the loop when variable exceeds this value Í added to the counter each subsequent time For is executed Programming 611
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 612
    is executed, the variable value is compared to the end value. If variable does not exceed end, the loop is executed; otherwise, program control jumps to the command following EndFor. i>5 i{5 :For i,0,5,1 EndFor :-------- Note: The For command automatically increments the counter variable so that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 613
    be true. • Any variables referenced in the condition must be set before the While command. (You can build the values into the program or prompt the user to enter the values.) • The loop must contain commands that change the values in the condition, eventually causing it to be false. Otherwise
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 614
    not executed. Loop...EndLoop Loops A Loop...EndLoop creates an infinite loop, which is repeated endlessly. The Loop command does not have any arguments. :Loop EndLoop :-------- Programming 614
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 615
    Typically, the loop contains commands that let the program exit from the loop. Commonly used commands are: If, Exit, Goto, and Lbl (label). For example: :0!x :Loop : Disp x : x+1!x Ê true. The If command could also use a Goto command to transfer program control to a specified Lbl (label) command
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 616
    ...EndLoop, the loop should contain commands that let the program exit from the loop. Configuring the Voyage™ 200 Programs can contain commands that change the configuration of the calculator. Because mode changes are particularly useful, the Program Editor's Mode toolbar menu makes it easy to enter
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 617
    calculator characteristics. Returns the name of the current folder. Returns the current setting for a specified mode. Returns a list of default units. Sets the current folder. Sets a specified graph format (Coordinates, Graph used in a program. See the Technical Reference module. Entering the SetMode Command
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 618
    from the User and Displaying Output Although values can be built into a program (or stored to variables in advance), a program can prompt the user to enter information while the program is running. Likewise, a program can display information such as the result of a calculation. Programming 618
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 619
    display the Graph screen and let the user update the variables xc and yc (rc and qc in polar mode) by positioning the graph cursor. Prompts the user to enter an expression. The expression is always treated as a string; the user does not need to enclose the expression in "quotes". Programming 619
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 620
    I/O screen. Displays an expression or string on the Program I/O screen. Disp can also display the current contents of the Program I/O screen without displaying additional information. Displays the current contents of the Graph screen. Displays the current contents of the Home screen. Displays
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 621
    character string. Notes: • In a program, simply performing a calculation does not display the result. You must use an output command. • After Disp and Output, the program immediately continues. You may want to add a Pause command. Graphical User Interface Commands Command Description Dialog
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 622
    also be used outside of a dialog box or toolbar program block. Creating a Custom Menu The custom menu feature lets you create your own toolbar menu. A custom menu can contain any available function, instruction, or set of characters. The calculator has a default custom menu that you can modify or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 623
    create a custom menu, you can let the user turn it on and off manually, or you can let a program turn it on and off automatically. To: Turn From the Home screen or a program: • Execute the CustmOn command. From any application: • Press 2 ½ again. - or - • Go to a different application. Using the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 624
    :... : Title title of F2 menu :: ... : Title title of F3 menu :... Note: When the user selects a menu item, the text defined by that Item command is pasted to the current cursor location. f(x) =" :Title "Solve" :Item "Solve(":Item " and ":Item "{x,y}" :Item "Solve( and ,{x,y})" Programming 624
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 625
    CustmOff" :EndCustm :CustmOn Note: The following may be slightly different than the default custom menu on your calculator. Ê Ë Note: See how "_\o\C" and "_\o\F" display as ¡C and ¡F in the menu. Similarly get the commands for the default menu. Copy those commands, use the Program Programming 625
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 626
    them into separate lines. You can create and use only one custom menu at a time. If you need more, write a separate program for each custom menu. Then run the program for the menu you need. Restoring the Default Custom Menu To restore the default: 1. From the Home screen's normal menu (not the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 627
    FnOff FnOn Description Erases any functions or expressions that were graphed with the Graph command. Creates a user-defined function. Displays the current contents of the Graph screen. Deselects all (or only specified) Y= functions. Selects all (or only specified) Y= functions. Programming 627
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 628
    setMode Style Trace ZoomBox - to - ZoomTrig Description Graphs one or more specified expressions, using the current graphing mode. Displays the Graph screen and lets the user update the variables xc and yc (rc and qc in polar mode) by positioning the graph cursor. Creates a new stat plot definition
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 629
    variable based on a matrix. Restores all settings stored in a graph database. Displays the Graph screen and superimposes a stored graph picture by using OR logic. Clears the Graph screen and displays a stored graph picture. Stores the current graph settings to a graph database variable. Copies the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 630
    to the Data/Matrix Editor module. Many drawing commands have two forms: one for pixel coordinates and one for point coordinates. Note: Pixel commands start with Pxl, such as PxlChg. Erasing Drawn Objects Command ClrDraw Description Erases all drawn objects from the Graph screen. Programming 630
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 631
    inverts a circle with a specified center and radius. Draws a line with a specified slope through a specified point. Draws, erases, or inverts a line between two sets of coordinates. Programming 631
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 632
    expression. Draws contours in 3D graphing mode. Draws two expressions and shades the areas where expression1 < expression2. Accessing Another Voyage™ 200, a CBL 2, or a CBR If you link two graphing calculators (described in the Connectivity module), programs on both units can transmit variables
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 633
    the CBL 2 or CBR. F3 I/O Toolbar Menu Use the Program Editor's ... I/O toolbar menu to enter the commands in this section. 1. Press ... and select 8:Link. 2. Select a command. Accessing Another Voyage™ 200 When two calculators are linked, one acts as a receiving unit and the other as a sending
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 634
    , refer to the manual that comes with the CBL 2 or CBR unit. Command Get Send Description Gets a variable from an attached CBL 2 or CBR and stores it in the graphing calculator. Sends a list variable from the graphing calculator to the CBL 2 or CBR. Debugging Programs and Handling Errors After
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 635
    Errors The first step in debugging your program is to run it. The graphing calculator automatically checks each executed command for syntax errors. If there is an error, a message indicates the nature of the error. • To display the program in the Program Editor, press ¸. The cursor appears in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 636
    an error to the next level of the Try...EndTry block. Example: Using Alternative Approaches The example in the Previews module shows a program that prompts the user to enter an integer, sums all integers from 1 to the entered integer, and displays the result. This section gives several approaches
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 637
    Ì :While i{n ©Ì : temp+i!temp ©Ì : i+1!I Ì :EndWhile Í :Text "The answer is "&string(temp) :EndPrgm Ê Prompts for input on Program I/O screen. Ë Converts string entered with InputStr to an expression. Ì Loop calculation. Í Displays output in a dialog box. Note: For {, type 8 µ (zero). For &, press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 638
    :Prgm Ê :Prompt n :0!temp:1!I Ë :Lbl top © : temp+i!temp © : i+1!I © : If i{n Ë : Goto top Ì :Disp temp :EndPrgm Ê Prompts for input on Program I/O screen. Ë Loop calculation. Ì Displays output on Program I/O screen. Note: Because Prompt returns n as a number, you do not need to use expr to convert
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 639
    uses Dialog...EndDlog to create dialog boxes for input and output. It uses Loop...EndLoop to calculate the result. :prog3() :Prgm Ê :Dialog © : Title "Enter an integer" © Ë Converts string entered with Request to an expression. Ì Loop calculation. Í Defines a dialog box for output. Programming 639
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 640
    loop. :prog4() :Prgm Ê :Input "Enter an integer",n Ë :sum(seq(i,i,1,n))!temp Ì :Disp temp :EndPrgm Ê Prompts for input on Program I/O. Ë Calculates sum. Ì Displays output on Program I/O screen. Note: Because Input returns n as a number, you do not need to use expr to convert n. Function seq Used
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 641
    Texas Instruments web site for up-to-date information. After downloading a program from the web to your computer, use a USB cable or TI-GRAPH LINK™ computer-to-calculator cable and TI Connect software to send the program to your Voyage™ 200. For Flash App installation instructions, see education.ti
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 642
    You can purchase computer-to-calculator and unit-to-unit cables from the TI Online Store at education.ti.com/buy. Running an Assembly-Language Program After a Voyage™ 200 assembly-language program is stored on your unit, you can run the program from the Home screen just as you would any other
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 643
    Cannot Edit an Assembly-Language Program You cannot use your Voyage™ 200 to edit an assembly-language program. The built-in Program Editor will not open assembly-language programs. Displaying a List of Assembly-Language Programs To list the assembly-language programs stored in memory: 1. Display the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 644
    write an assemblylanguage program is beyond the scope of this book. However, if you have a working knowledge of assembly language, please check the Texas Instruments web site (education.ti.com) for specific information about how to access Voyage™ 200 features. The graphing calculator also includes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 645
    set as Text and cannot be changed. Shows the folder in which the text variable will be stored. For information about folders, refer to the Calculator Home Screen module. To use a different folder, press B to display a menu of existing folders. Then select a folder. Text Editor 645
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 646
    saved automatically as you type. You do not need to save a session manually before leaving the Text Editor, starting a new session, or opening a previous one. Resuming the Current Session You can leave the Text Editor and go to another application at any time. To return to the session that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 647
    Starting a New Session from the Text Editor To leave the current Text Editor session and start a new one: 1. Press ƒ and select 3:New. 2. Specify a folder and text variable for the new session. 3. Press ¸ twice. Opening a Previous Session You can open a previous Text Editor session at any time. 1.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 648
    Copying a Session In some cases, you may want to copy a session so that you can edit the copy while retaining the original. 1. Display the session you want to copy. 2. Press ƒ and select 2:Save Copy As. 3. Specify the folder and text variable for the copied session. 4. Press ¸ twice. Note about
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 649
    and TI Connect™ software with the Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator, you can use the computer keyboard to type a text file and then send that file to the Voyage™ 200. This is useful if you need to create a lengthy text file. For information about obtaining cables or updated TI Connect™ software, check
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 650
    to scroll through a session or position the text cursor. • Press 2 C or 2 D to scroll up or down one screen at a time, and ¹ C or ¹ D to go to the top or bottom of the text session. Typing Alphabetic Characters To: Press: Type a single lowercase alpha character. H the letter key Type a single
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 651
    Deleting Characters To delete: Press: The character to the left of the cursor 0 or , 7 The character to the right of the cursor ¥ 8 (same as ¥ 0) All characters to the right of the cursor through the end of the paragraph M All characters in the paragraph (regardless M M of the cursor's
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 652
    new text. Delete highlighted text Press 0. Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text Cutting and copying both place highlighted text into the clipboard of the Voyage™ 200. Cutting deletes the text from its current location (used to move text) and copying leaves the text. 1. Highlight the text you want to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 653
    4. Move the text cursor to the location where you want to insert the text. 5. Press ƒ and then select 6:Paste. You can use this general procedure to cut, copy, and paste text: • Within the same text session. • From one text session to another. After cutting or copying text in one session, open the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 654
    to beginning of the search text. Does not move. Inserting or Overtyping a Character By default, the Voyage™ 200 is in insert mode. To toggle between insert and overtype mode, press 2 /. If the Voyage™ 200 is in: The next character you type: Will be inserted at the cursor. Thin cursor between
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 655
    Clearing the Text Editor To erase all existing paragraphs and display an empty text screen, press ƒ and then select 8:Clear Editor. Entering Special Characters You can use the CHAR menu to select any special character from a list. You can also type certain commonly used characters from the keyboard.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 656
    for other calculator features. The keyboard map does not display all available shortcuts. Refer to the inside front and the inside back covers the Voyage™ 200: • Press ¹ " to display the keyboard map. • Press N to exit the map. Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator Keyboard map Voyage™ 200 keyboard map
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 657
    letter you press (described later in this section). Typing Special Symbols from the Keyboard Note: To help you find the applicable keys, these maps show only the special symbols. On the Voyage™ 200: f Press 2 and then the key for the symbol. For example: 2 H displays &. These special symbols are not
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 658
    Typing Accent Marks from the Voyage™ 200 Keyboard Pressing an accent mark key does not display an accented letter. The accent mark will be added to the next letter you press. 1. Press 2 and then the key for the accent mark. Note: To help you find the applicable keys, this map shows only the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 659
    Letters from the Keyboard Press the key combination that accesses the Greek character set on your calculator. Then select the applicable alpha character on the keyboard to enter a Greek letter. On the Voyage™ 200: f Press 2 G to access the Greek character set. ΠπΠπ QQ WW EE RR T Y UU II OO PP
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 660
    • Press 2 G 7 + letter to access uppercase Greek letters. Example: 2 G 7 W displays Ω For a List of All Special Characters For a list of all special characters, refer to the Technical Reference module. Entering and Executing a Command Script By using a command script, you can use the Text Editor to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 661
    3. Select 1:Command. C is displayed at the beginning of the text line (to the left of the colon). Note: This does not insert a new line for the command, it simply marks an existing line as a command line. 4. Type a command just as you would on the Home screen. The line can contain only the command,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 662
    Executing a Command To execute a command, you must first mark the line with a C. If you execute a line that is not marked with C, it will be ignored. 1. Place the cursor anywhere on the command line. 2. Press †. The command is copied to the entry line on the Home screen and executed. The Home screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 663
    You can also use 3 to set up a split screen manually. However, ... sets up a Text Editor/Home screen split much easier than 3. • The active application is indicated information, refer to "Saving the Home Screen Entries as a Text Editor Script" in the Calculator Home Screen module. Text Editor 663
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 664
    before pressing † again. 4. Continue using † to execute each command, but stop just before executing the Graph command. 5. Execute the Graph command. Note: In this example, the Graph command displays the Graph screen in place of the Home screen. 6. Press ... and select 2:Clear split to return to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 665
    Numeric Solver Displaying the Solver and Entering an Equation After you display the Numeric Solver, start by entering the equation that you want to solve. Displaying the Numeric Solver To display the Numeric Solver, press O and then select the Numeric Solver icon. Press ¸. The Numeric Solver screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 666
    You can: For example: Refer to a function or equation defined elsewhere. Notes: • Do not use system function names (such as y1(x) or r1(q)) as simple variables (y1 or r1). • Be careful with implied multiplication. For example, a(m2+m1) is treated as a function reference, not as a†(m2+m1). Suppose
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 667
    Recalling Previously Entered Equations Your most recently entered equations (up to 11 with the default setting) are retained in memory. To recall one of these equations: 1. From the Numeric Solver screen, press à ‡. A dialog box displays the most recently entered equation. 2. Select an equation.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 668
    Saving Equations for Future Use Because the number of equations that you can recall with ‡ Eqns is limited, a particular equation may not be retained indefinitely. To store the current equation for future use, save it to a variable. 1. From the Numeric Solver screen, press , and select 2:Save Copy
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 669
    2. Select the applicable folder and equation variable. 3. Press ¸. Variable eqn contains the current equation; it always appears alphabetically in the list. Defining the Known Variables After you type an equation in the Numeric Solver, enter the applicable values for all variables except the unknown
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 670
    Enter a number or expression for all variables except the one you want to solve for. Notes and Common Errors • If you define a variable: - In terms of another variable in the equation, that variable must be defined first. - In terms of another variable that is not Since a is defined in in the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 671
    solve for a system In the standard viewing window, xmax=10. variable other than exp. Also, if the equation contains a system variable, you cannot use ... to graph. • Although you can use a system variable in the equation, an error occurs if you use ... to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 672
    • If you see the error shown to the right, delete the entered variable value. Then edit the equation to use a different variable. Note: This error occurs if you use a reserved name incorrectly or refer to an undefined system function as a simple variable without parentheses. For example, y1(x) is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 673
    be two floating point elements with the first one less than or equal to the second one. Note: You can also select an initial guess graphically. Solving for the Unknown Variable After you type an equation in the Numeric Solver and enter values for the known variables, you are ready to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 674
    Note: To stop (break) a calculation, press ´. The unknown variable shows the value being equation. If the iterative process cannot converge on a solution, this error occurs. Graphing the Solution You can graph an equation's solutions any time after defining the known variables, either before or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 675
    : • The unknown variable is plotted on the x axis. • leftNrt is plotted on the y axis. Solutions for the equation exist at leftNrt=0, where the graph crosses the x axis. The current graph format settings are used. Note: For more information, refer to the Split Screens module. Numeric Solver 675
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 676
    Solver, the Graph screen may continue to display the equation's solution, ignoring any selected Y= functions. If so, display the Y= Editor and then return to the Graph screen. Also, the graph is reset when you change the Graph mode or use ClrGraph from the Home screen († 5) or a program. Numeric
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 677
    the unknown variable value, and yc is the leftNrt value. 4. Press „ to re-solve the equation. † sets the graph cursor's xc value as an initial guess and the yc value as leftNrt. The graph's xmin and xmax values are set as the bounds. Returning to a Full Screen From the split screen: • To
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 678
    exist after you leave the Numeric Solver. If the equation contains single-character variables, their values may inadvertently affect later symbolic calculations. Before leaving the Numeric Solver, you may want to: 1. Press: Hˆ to clear all single-character variables in the current folder. 2. Press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 679
    Number Bases Entering and Converting Number Bases Regardless of the Base mode, you must always use the appropriate prefix when entering a binary or hexadecimal number. Entering a Binary or Hexadecimal Number To enter a binary number, use the form: 0b binaryNumber (for example: 0b11100110) Binary
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 680
    Converting between Number Bases Use the 4 conversion operator integerExpression 4 Bin integerExpression 4 Dec integerExpression 4 Hex For 4, press 2 4. Also, you can select base conversions from the MATH/Base menu. For example, to convert 256 from decimal to binary: 256 4 Bin For a binary or hex
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 681
    2. From the Home screen, type the number If Base mode = HEX: that you want to convert (using the correct prefix) and press ¸. Performing Math Operations with Hex or Bin Numbers For any operation that uses an integer number, you can enter a hexadecimal or binary number. Results are displayed
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 682
    The Base mode controls the displayed format If Base mode = HEX: of integer results only. Note: The Base mode affects output only. You must always use the 0h or 0b prefix to enter a hex or binary number. Fractional and floating-point results are always shown in decimal form. 0h prefix in result
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 683
    Size Limitations When Base = HEX or BIN When Base=HEX or BIN, an integer result is stored internally as a signed, 32-bit binary number, which uses the range (shown in hexadecimal and decimal): 0hFFFFFFFF 0h1 L1 1 0h80000000 0h0 'L2,147,483,648 0 0h7FFFFFFF 2,147,483,647 If a result's
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 684
    Operator with syntax integer1 and integer2 integer1 or integer2 integer1 xor integer2 Description In a bit-by-bit and comparison, the result is 1 if both bits are 1; otherwise, the result is 0. The returned value represents the bit results. In a bit-by-bit or comparison, the result is 1 if either
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 685
    0h7AC36 = 0b00000000000001111010110000110110 and and 0h3D5F 0b00000000000000000011110101011111 0b00000000000000000010110000010110 = 0h2C16 Leading zeros are not shown in the result. Note: If you enter an integer that is too large to be stored in a signed, 32-bit binary form, a symmetric modulo
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 686
    Function with syntax shift(integer) - or - shift(integer,#ofShifts) Description If #ofShifts is: • omitted - bits shift once to the right (default is L1). • negative - bits shift the specified number of times to the right. • positive - bits shift the specified number of times to the left. In a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 687
    Each bit shifts to the right. 7AC36 = 0b00000000000001111010110000110110 Inserts 0 if leftmost bit is 0, or 1 if leftmost bit is 1 Dropped b00000000000000111101011000011011 = 0h3D61B Leading zeros are not shown in the result. The result is displayed according to the Base mode. Note: If you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 688
    the variables are stored in RAM or the user data archive. You can also use this screen to reset the memory. Displaying the MEMORY Screen Press 2 ;. (The numbers on your MEMORY screen may vary from those shown.) Prgm/Asn: Includes programs written for the Voyage™ 200 as well as any assembly-language
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 689
    from Flash ROM. Resetting will delete all data, programs, and Flash applications from RAM and Flash ROM. Important: To delete individual (instead of all) variables, use VAR-LINK. 3. When prompted for confirmation, press ¸. The Voyage™ 200 displays a message when the reset is complete. Note
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 690
    can manipulate the variables and/or folders. Displaying the VAR-LINK Screen Press 2 °. By default, the VAR-LINK screen lists all user-defined variables in all folders and with all data types. Ë Ê Ì Î Í Ê Folder names (alphabetically listed) Ë Shows installed Flash applications Ì Size in bytes
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 691
    This... 6 6 Ÿ Œ û Indicates this... Expanded folder view (to right of folder name). You can scroll for more variables and/or folders (in bottom left corner of screen). If selected with †. Locked Archived To scroll through the list: • Press D or C. (Use 2 D or 2 C to scroll one page at a time.) -
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 692
    PRGM STR TEXT Description Assembly-language program Data Expression (includes numeric values) Function Graph database List Matrix Picture of a graph Program String Text Editor session Types not listed above are miscellaneous data types used by software applications. Closing the VAR-LINK Screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 693
    Press: N To: Return to the current application without pasting the highlighted name. Displaying Information about Variables on the Home Screen From the Home screen, you can display information about variables without opening the VAR-LINK screen. • To determine if a variable with a given name
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 694
    the Contents of a Variable You can show all variable types except ASM, DATA, GDB, and variables created by Flash Apps. For example, you must open a DATA variable in the Data/Matrix Editor. 1. On VAR-LINK, move the cursor to highlight the variable. 2. Press: ˆ If you highlight a folder, the screen
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 695
    Folders give you a convenient way to manage variables by organizing them into related groups. The Voyage™ 200 has one built-in folder named MAIN. Unless you create other folders and designate a user-created folder as the current folder, all variables are stored in the MAIN folder by default
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 696
    -defined functions). For example, you can create separate folders for different Voyage™ 200 applications (Math, Text Editor, etc.) or classes. You can store a user-defined variable in any existing folder. The user-defined variables in one folder are independent of the variables in any other folder
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 697
    The system variables in the MAIN folder are always directly accessible, regardless of the current folder. Note: User-defined variables are stored in the "current folder" unless you specify otherwise. Creating a Folder from the VAR-LINK Screen 1. Press 2 °. 2. Press ƒ Manage and select 5:Create
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 698
    Setting the Current Folder from the Home Screen Enter the setFold function on the Home screen. setFold (folderName) setFold is a function, which requires you to enclose the folder name in parentheses. When you execute setFold, it returns the name of the folder that was previously set as the current
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 699
    ¸ twice. If you selected multiple items, you are prompted to enter a new name for each one. Using Variables in Different Folders You can access a user-defined variable or function that is not in the current folder. Specify the complete pathname instead of only the variable name. A pathname has the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 700
    For example: If Current Folder = MAIN Folders and Variables MAIN a=1 f(x)=x³+x²+x MATH a=42 f(x)=3x²+4x+25 To see a list of existing folders and variables, press 2 °. On the VAR-LINK screen, you can highlight a variable and press ¸ to paste that variable name to the open application's entry line.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 701
    scroll for additional variable types. 3. Select the new setting. 4. When you are back on the VAR-LINK VIEW screen, press ¸. The VAR-LINK screen is updated to show only the specified folder, variable type, or Flash application. Memory and Variable Management 701
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 702
    Copying or Moving Variables from One Folder to Another You must have at least one folder other than MAIN. You cannot use VAR-LINK to copy variables within the same folder. 1. On VAR-LINK, select the variables. 2. Press ƒ Manage and select 2:Copy or 4:Move. 3. Select the destination folder. 4. Press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 703
    2. Press ƒ Manage and select 6:Lock or 7:UnLock. Œ indicates a locked variable or folder in RAM. û indicates an archived variable, which is locked automatically. Deleting a Folder from the VAR-LINK Screen When you delete a folder from the VAR-LINK screen, all of the variables in that folder are also
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 704
    command deletes all variables of the specified type in all folders. • To delete an empty folder, enter the DelFold command on the calculator Home screen. DelFold folder1 [, folder2] [, folder3] ... Note: You cannot delete the MAIN folder. Pasting a Variable Name to an Application Suppose you are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 705
    • Home screen, Y= Editor, Table Editor, or Data/Matrix Editor - The cursor must be on the entry line. • Text Editor, Window Editor, Numeric Solver, or Program Editor - The cursor can be anywhere on the screen. You can also paste a variable name to the current cursor location in many Flash
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 706
    the Home screen or a program. Why Would You Want to Archive a Variable? The user data archive lets you: • Store data, programs, or any other variables reserved names or system variables. - If you acquire additional programs for your Voyage™ 200, particularly if they are large, you may need to create
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 707
    free RAM can improve performance times for certain types of calculations. From the VAR-LINK Screen To archive or unarchive: an archived variable is still in its original folder; it is simply stored in the user data archive instead of RAM. Note: An archived variable is locked automatically. You can
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 708
    Garbage Collection Message Is Displayed If you use the user data archive extensively, you may see a Garbage Collection message. This occurs if you try to archive a variable when there is not enough free archive memory. However, the Voyage™ 200 will attempt to rearrange the archived variables to make
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 709
    archive will take longer than usual. It also alerts you that the archive may fail if there is not enough memory. • Can alert you when a program is caught in a loop that repetitively fills the user data archive. Cancel the archive and investigate the reason. Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary? The
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 710
    any empty block. How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process When you unarchive a variable, it is copied to RAM but it is not actually deleted from user data archive memory. Memory and Variable Management 710
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 711
    a variable, you may still get a Garbage Collection message. The Voyage™ 200 has 2.7 MB of user-available Flash ROM memory. All 2.7 MB can be used for Flash Apps, but only approximately 1 MB of it can be used for user data archive. The Garbage Collection Process The garbage collection process
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 712
    variable. This may cause you to ask, "If the variable is in the user data archive, why does it matter how much RAM is available?" The answer Opening a data variable, list, or matrix in the Data/Matrix Editor. • Opening a program or function in the Program Editor. Memory and Variable Management 712
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 713
    performs a "behind-the scenes" copy. For example, if you run a program that is in the user data archive, the Voyage™ 200: 1. Copies the program to RAM. 2. Runs the program. 3. Deletes the copy from RAM when the program is finished. The error message is displayed if there is not enough free RAM for
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 714
    • Archiving large variables or programs (moving them from RAM to the user data archive). Note: Typically, the RAM free size must be larger than the archived variable. Memory and Variable Management 714
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 715
    , depending on how you set them up from the VAR-LINK screen. You can link a TI-89 Titanium or Voyage™ 200 to another TI-89 Titanium, Voyage™ 200, TI-89, or TI-92 Plus. I/O unit-to-unit cable I/O Port voyage 200 I/O Port voyage 200 Two Voyage™ 200 calculators linked together Connectivity 715
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 716
    I/O Port A TI-89 Titanium and a Voyage™ 200 linked together Transmitting Variables, Flash Applications, and Folders Transmitting variables is a convenient way to share any variable listed on the VAR-LINK screen - functions, programs, etc. You can also transmit Flash applications (Apps) and folders
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 717
    the Units Flash applications will transfer only between certain units. You can transfer an App from a Voyage™ 200 to another Voyage™ 200, or from a Voyage™ 200 to a TI-92 Plus. 1. Connect two graphing calculators using the appropriate cable. 2. On the sending unit, press 2 ° to display the VAR-LINK
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 718
    and its contents. A checkmark appears beside the folder, but not beside the contents. Collapsed Flash App folders do not automatically become expanded. • To select multiple variables, Flash applications, or folders, highlight each one and press † to place a checkmark (Ÿ) beside it. Use †
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 719
    is complete, the VAR-LINK screen is updated on the receiving unit. Note: Before transferring a purchased App, the receiving unit must have the appropriate required. A certificate is a file that is generated by TI. Free and concept Apps do not require a certificate. Rules for Transmitting Variables,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 720
    archived variables have the same names on both the sending and receiving units, a message asks you to confirm that you will allow the variables to be overwritten. If you select: Unlocked variable Locked variable Archived variable Unlocked Flash application Locked Flash application Unlocked Folder
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 721
    Canceling a Transmission From either the sending or receiving unit: 1. Press ´. An error message is displayed. 2. Press N or ¸. Common Error and Notification Messages Shown on: Sending unit Message and Description: This is displayed after several seconds if: • A cable is not attached to the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 722
    Shown on: Sending unit Message and Description: Receiving unit The receiving unit does not have the correct certification for the operating system (OS) or Flash application being sent. New Name is active only if you change Overwrite to NO. The receiving unit has a variable with the same name as
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 723
    on the default VAR-LINK screen, this selects the folder and its contents. Collapsed folders become expanded when selected. - If selecting a Flash App (from the F7 tab), this selects the App folder and its contents. A checkmark appears beside the folder, but not beside the contents. Collapsed Flash
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 724
    certificate from the Texas Instruments Web site to a computer, and use a USB Silver Edition cable to install the application or certificate on your Voyage™ 200 Graphing Calculator. For Flash App installation instructions, see education.ti.com/guides. Transmitting Variables under Program Control You
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 725
    The "Chat" Program The following program uses GetCalc and SendCalc. The program sets up two loops that let the linked devices take turns sending and receiving/displaying a variable named msg. InputStr lets each user enter a message in the msg variable. :Chat() :Prgm :ClrIO :Disp "On first unit
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 726
    message. To synchronize GetCalc and SendCalc, the loops are arranged so that the receiving unit executes GetCalc while the sending unit is waiting for the user to enter a message. Running the Program This procedure assumes that: • The two devices are linked with the connecting cable. • The Chat
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 727
    identical model (for example, from a TI-89 Titanium to a TI-89 Titanium or from a Voyage™ 200 to a Voyage™ 200). Installing OS software resets all device memory to the original factory settings. This means that all user-defined variables (in both RAM and the user data archive), functions, programs
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 728
    a new OS on your calculator. See the important information concerning batteries before performing an OS upgrade. Important Operating System Download Information New batteries should be installed before beginning an OS download. If you are operating your Voyage™ 200 in a language other than
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 729
    the Texas Instruments Web site to a computer, and use a USB Silver Edition cable to install the OS or application on your Voyage™ 200. For complete information, refer to the instructions on the web. Transferring the Operating System OS software will transfer only from a TI-89 Titanium to a TI-89
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 730
    Link two like units together, for example, a TI-89 Titanium to a TI-89 Titanium; or a Voyage™ 200 to a Voyage™ 200. 2. On the receiving and the sending unit, VAR-LINK screen. • The receiving unit returns to either the Apps desktop or the Home screen. You may need to use 8 | (lighten
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 731
    System on Multiple Units To perform an OS upgrade on multiple units, download and install the OS into one unit and then transfer the OS upgrade of charge and you do not need to obtain a certificate before you download or install them. Error Messages Most error messages are displayed on the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 732
    certificate, you can download it again from the Texas Instruments Web site at education.ti.com and then install the App again on your calculator. An error occurred during the transfer. The current OS in the receiving unit is corrupted. You must reinstall the product software from a computer. Replace
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 733
    A group certificate allows distribution of purchased software to multiple TI-89 Titanium, TI-89, Voyage™ 200, or TI-92 Plus units. The software can be loaded, deleted from, and reloaded to the devices as often as needed for as long as the software remains listed in the group certificate. You may add
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 734
    Step: On the: 3. Additional units Do this: The sending unit adds a copy of its unique ID number to the collection unit's ID list. The sending unit always retains its own ID number, which cannot be deleted from the device. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the IDs are collected onto one device.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 735
    data and programs are compatible with each other, with a few exceptions. Most functions of the TI-89 Titanium are compatible with the TI-89, Voyage™ 200, and TI-92 Plus. The TI-89 Titanium and the TI-89 are similar, except that the TI-89 Titanium has more memory (more room for Apps and user archive
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 736
    89 Titanium TI-89 TI-89 Titanium OS Apps Variables Apps Variables Voyage™ 2 Variables 00 TI-89 Apps Variables OS Apps Variables Variables TI-92 Plus Variables Variables Voyage™ 2 00 TI-92 Plus Variables Variables Variables Variables OS Apps Variables Apps Variables Apps Variables OS Apps
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 737
    Activities Analyzing the Pole-Corner Problem A ten-foot-wide hallway meets a five-foot-wide hallway in the corner of a building. Find the maximum length pole that can be moved around the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 738
    10 w a c b a = w+5 b = 10a w 5 1. Define the expression for side a in terms of w and store it in a(w). Note: When you want to define a function, use multiple character names as you build the definition. 2. Define the expression for side b in terms of w and store it in b(w). 3. Define the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 739
    . Result: Approximately 20.8097 feet. Note: Use the auto-paste feature to copy the result from step 4 to the entry line inside the parentheses of c( ) and press 8 ¸. Deriving the Quadratic Formula This activity shows you how to derive the quadratic formula: x = ------b b---2---------4----a---c2a
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 740
    equation: ax2+bx+c=0. 3. Subtract c from both sides of the equation. 2±| C Note: This example uses the result of the last answer to perform computations on the Voyage™ 200. This feature reduces keystroking and chances for error. Activities 740
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 741
    4. Divide both sides of the equation by the leading coefficient a. Note: Continue to use the last answer (2 ±) as in step 3 in steps 4 through 9. 5. Use the expand( ) function to expand the result of the last answer. 6. Complete the square by adding ((b/a)/2)2 to both sides of the equation. 7.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 742
    both sides and then dividing by 2a. Note: This is only one of the two general quadratic solutions due to the constraint in step 9. Exploring a Matrix This activity shows you how to perform several
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 743
    x, and then use the augment( ) function, to augment the 3x3 identity to a and store the result in b. 3. Use rref( ) to "row reduce" matrix b: The result will have the identity matrix in the first three columns and a^L1 in the last three columns. Note: Use the cursor in the history area to scroll
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 744
    for the value of x that will cause the inverse of the matrix to be invalid. Enter: solve(getDenom( 2 ± [1,4] )=0,x) for the values of x between 0 and 3p. Method 1: Graph Plot Perform the following steps to observe where the graphs of the functions y1(x)=cos(x) and y2(x)=sin(x) intersect. 1. In
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 745
    4. Find the intersection point of the two functions. Note: Press ‡ and select 5:Intersection. Respond to the screen prompts to select the two curves, and the lower and upper bounds for intersection A. 5. Note the x and y coordinates. (Repeat steps 4 and 5 to find the other intersections.) Method 2:
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 746
    having a constant volume V. Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in Symbolic Manipulation and 3D Graphing. Exploring a 3D Graph of the Surface Area of a Parallelepiped Perform the following steps to define a function for the surface area of a parallelepiped, draw
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 747
    [0,15,15] z= [260,300] ncontour= [5] 4. Graph the function and use Trace to go to the point close to the minimum value of the surface area function. Finding the Minimum Surface Area Analytically Perform the following steps to solve the problem
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 748
    2. Find the minimum surface area when the value of v equals 300. Enter: 300!v Enter: sa(v^(1/3), v^(1/3),v) Note: Press ¸ to obtain the exact result in symbolic form. Press 8 ¸ to obtain the approximate result in decimal form. Running a Tutorial Script Using the Text Editor This activity shows you
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 749
    2. Type the following lines into the Text Editor. : Compute the maximum value of f on the closed interval [a,b] : assume that f is differentiable on [a,b] C : define f(x)=x^3N2x^2+xN7 C : 1!a:3.22!b C : d(f(x),x)!df(x) C : zeros(df(x),x) C : f(ans(1)) C : f({a,b}) : The largest number from the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 750
    a time. Note: Press † and select 2:Clear split to go back to a full-sized Text Editor screen. 5. To see the results of the script on a fullsized screen, go to the Home screen. Note: Press 2 K twice to in this example can be found in Basic Function Graphing and Symbolic Manipulation. Activities 750
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 751
    Decomposing a Rational Function To examine the decomposition of the rational function f(x)=(x3N10x2Nx+50)/(xN2) on a graph: 1. On the Home screen, enter the rational function as shown below and store it in a function f(x). Enter: (x^3N10x^2Nx+50)/(xN2)!f(x) Note: Actual entries are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 752
    5. In the Y= Editor, select the thick graphing style for y2(x). 6. Add the original function f(x) to y3(x) and select the square graphing style. 7. In the Window Editor, set the window variables to: x= [L10,15,10] y= [L100,100,10] 8. Draw the graph. Note: Be sure the Graph mode is set to Function.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 753
    rational expression is basically a quadratic function as x gets very large in both the positive and negative directions. The lower graph is y3(x)=f(x) graphed separately using the line style. Studying Statistics: Filtering Data by Categories This activity provides a statistical study of the weights
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 754
    and academic year (freshman, sophomore, junior, or senior). The data (weight in pounds) and respective categories are entered in the Data/Matrix Editor. Table 1: Category vs. Description Category (C2) Academic Year and Sex 1 Freshman boys 2 Freshman girls 3 Sophomore boys 4 Sophomore girls
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 755
    Perform the following steps to compare the weight of high school students to their year in school. 1. Start the Data/Matrix Editor, and create a new Data variable named students. 2. Enter the data and categories from Table 2 into columns c1 and c2, respectively. 3. Open the „ Plot Setup
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 756
    5. Copy Plot 1 to Plot 2. 6. Repeat step 5 and copy Plot 1 to Plot 3, Plot 4, and Plot 5. 7. Press ƒ, and modify the Include Categories item for Plot 2 through Plot 5 to the following: Plot 2: {1,2} (freshman boys, girls) Plot 3: {7,8} (senior boys, girls) Plot 4: {1,3,5,7} (all boys) Plot 5:
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 757
    This activity provides a program that can be used when the Voyage™ 200 is connected to a Calculator-Based Laboratory™ (CBL 2™) unit. This program works with the "Newton's Law of Cooling" experiment. You can use your computer keyboard to type lengthy text and then use TI Connect™ software to send it
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 758
    any previous graphs. Clear the Voyage™ 200 Program IO (input/output) screen. Set up the Window variables. Create and/or clear a list named data. Create and/or clear a list named time. Send a command to clear the CBL 2™ unit. Set up Chan. 2 of the CBL 2™ to AutoID to record temp. Prompt the user to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 759
    time and data using NewPlot and the Trace tool. Display the graph. Re-label the axes. Stop the program. You can also use the Calculator-Based Ranger™ system (CBR™) to explore the mathematical and scientific relationships between distance, velocity, acceleration, and time using data collected from
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 760
    Setting Up a Parametric Graph and Table Perform the following steps to study the flight of a hit baseball that has an initial velocity of 95 feet per second and an
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 761
    300,50] y values= [0,100,10] 6. Switch to the right side and display the graph. Note: Press 2 a. 7. Display the TABLE SETUP dialog box, and change tblStart to Note: Press 8 '. 9. Switch to the right side. Press ..., and trace the graph to show the values of xc and yc when tc=2. Note: As you move the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 762
    of a cubic polynomial. Visualizing Complex Roots Perform the following steps to expand the cubic polynomial (xN1)(xNi)(x+i), find the absolute value of the function, graph the modulus surface, and use the Trace tool to explore the modulus surface. 1. On the Home screen, use the expand( ) function to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 763
    to find the absolute value of f(x+yi). (This calculation may take about 2 minutes.) Note: The absolute value it in the function z1(x,y). Note: The graph of z1(x,y) will be the modulus surface. 5. Set the unit to 3D graph mode, turn on the axes for graph format, and set the Window variables to:
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 764
    Format variables to: Axes= ON Labels= ON Style= HIDDEN SURFACE Note: Calculating and drawing the graph takes about three minutes. 7. Graph the modulus surface. The 3D graph is used to visually display a picture of the roots where the surface touches the xy plane. 8. Use the Trace tool to explore
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 765
    complex zeros 1,Li, i of the polynomial x3Nx2+xN1 can be visualized with the three points where the graph of the modulus surface touches the xy plane. Solving a Standard Annuity Problem This activity can be used to find the interest rate, starting principal, number of compounding periods, and future
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 766
    Finding the Interest Rate of an Annuity Perform the following steps to find the interest rate (i) of an annuity where the starting principal (p) is 1,000, number of compounding periods (n) is 6, and the future value (s) is 2,000. 1. On the Home screen, enter the equation to solve for p. 2. Enter the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 767
    used to find the cost of financing an item. Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in the electronic chapter Programming, which is available from the TI Web site at education.ti.com and on the CD in this package. Time-Value-of- Money Function In the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 768
    ) :Return approx(nsolve(tempfunc=0,#tempstr1)) :EndIf :EndFor :Return "parameter error" :EndFunc Note: You can use your computer keyboard to type lengthy text and then use TI Connect™ software to send it to the Voyage™ 200. Activities 768
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 769
    Finding the Monthly Payment Find the monthly payment on 10,000 if you make 48 payments at 10% interest per year. On the Home screen, enter the tvm values to find pmt. Result: The monthly payment is 251.53. Finding the Number of Payments Find the number of payments it will take to pay off the loan if
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 770
    Finding Factors Enter the expressions shown below on the Home screen. 1. factor(x^3N5x) ¸ displays a rational result. 2. factor(x^3+5x) ¸ displays a rational result. 3. factor(x^3N5x,x) ¸ displays a real result. 4. cfactor(x^3+5x,x) ¸ displays a complex result. Activities 770
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 771
    replacing them. Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in the electronic chapter Programming. Sampling-without- Replacement Function In the Program Editor, define drawball( ) as a function that can be called with two parameters. The first parameter is a list where
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 772
    Sampling without Replacement Suppose an urn contains n1 balls of a color, n2 balls of a second color, n3 balls of a third color, etc. Simulate drawing balls without replacing them. 1. Enter a random seed using the RandSeed command. 2. Assuming the urn contains 10 red balls and 25 white balls,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 773
    Eastward Traveling Current Intended Path a mph Boat Actual Path river bank 1. Set the modes for Page 1 as shown in this screen. (Show angles in degrees and display all digits with a floating decimal point.) Press: 3 D D D. On the Angle option, select 2:DEGREE. On the Display Digits option, select
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 774
    3. Enter vectors describing the initial path of the boat, water current, and resultant path of the boat. Store these vectors as i, c, and r. Use the value a for the unknown speed of the current. Use the value b for the speed of the boat. Enter: [20,80¡]!i [a,0¡]!c [b,60°]!r Vectors are commonly
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 775
    When converted to rectangular form, the sum of vectors i and c equals the resultant vector r. 5. Using function p2r, convert vectors i, c, and r to rectangular form. Enter: p2r(i)!i p2r(c)!c p2r(r)!r Because the vectors are equal, the xcoordinate of i+c must equal the x-coordinate of the resultant
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 776
    7. Solve eq2 for b to calculate the actual speed of the boat. solve(eq2,b) 8. Substitute the known value of b into eq1, and solve eq1 for a to determine a, the speed of the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 777
    Activities 777
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 778
    the syntax and action of each Voyage™ 200 function and instruction that is included in the operating system (OS). See modules relating to calculator software applications (Apps) for functions and instructions specific to those Apps. Name of the function or instruction. Key or menu for entering the
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 779
    Calculus Graphics Lists This section lists the Voyage™ 200 functions and instructions in () 861 878 tCollect() 888 tExpand() 888 895 ‰() (integrate) 907 Π() (product) 908 G() (sum) 908 arcLen 802 811 DrawParm 812 812 DrwCtour 813 821 Graph 827 834 LineTan 835 845 PtChg 855 856
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 780
    Fill 819 LU 840 max() 841 min() 843 newMat() 845 QR 858 rowAdd() 865 rowSwap() 866 stdDev() 881 sum() 884 variance() 892 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 781
    Programming = 905 ≤ 906 # (indirection) 909 and 785 checkTmr() 790 ClrErr 791 ClrIO 792 CustmOff 801 Cycle 802 DelFold 806 setFold() 869 setTable() 871 setTmZn() 872 Stop 883 Table 885 timeCnv() 888 Try 890 when() 892 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 783
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 782
    () 809 expr() 817 format() 821 inString() 830 left() 832 mid() 842 ord() 849 right() 864 rotate() 864 shift() 874 string() 883 784 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 783
    all examples in this section were performed in the default reset mode, and all variables are assumed to be undefined. abs(expression1) ⇒ expression abs(list1) ⇒ list abs(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the absolute value of the argument. If the argument is a Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 785
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 784
    Graph screen and logically "ANDS" the picture stored in picVar and the current graph (0,0), which is the upper left corner of the screen. In function graphing mode and Y= Editor: y1(x) = cos(x) C ˆ Style = ) ⇒ list angle(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a list or matrix of angles of the elements in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 785
    ⇒ list approx(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a list or matrix where each element has been the specified variables from RAM to the user data archive memory. Archive arctest ¸ 5ùarctest Regardless of the graphing mode, arc length is calculated as an integral assuming a function mode Instructions 787
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 786
    of list1. augment(matrix1, matrix2) ⇒ matrix augment(matrix1; matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns a new matrix that is matrix2 appended to matrix1. When the forward-difference quotient (average rate of change). expression1 can be a user-defined function name (see Func). h is the step value. If Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 787
    (x in the example to the right) are ¥ " calculated according to the Window variable BldData ¸ Done values. O 6 ¸ For information about the increments used to evaluate a graph, refer to the module that describes that graphing mode. 3D graphing mode has two independent variables. In the sample
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 788
    char(65) ¸ "A" character numbered integer from the TI-89 Titanium/Voyage™ 200 character set. See Appendix B for a complete listing the startTmr() function. You can also use a list or matrix of starttime integers. Valid starttime integers must fall between 0 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 789
    and resets the Smart Graph feature so that the next time the Graph screen is displayed, the graph will be redrawn. While viewing the Graph screen, you can clear all drawn items (such as lines and points) by pressing † (ReGraph) or pressing ˆ and selecting 1:ClrDraw. ClrErr CATALOG ClrErr Program
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 790
    selecting 8:Clear Home. For functions such as solve() that return arbitrary constants or integers (@1, @2, etc.), ClrHome resets the suffix to 1. ClrIO CATALOG ClrIO Clears the Program I/O screen. ClrTable CATALOG ClrTable Clears all table values. Applies only to the ASK setting on the Table
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 791
    list1[,var]) ⇒ list comDenom(matrix1[,var]) ⇒ matrix comDenom(expression1) returns a reduced ratio of a ) MATH/Complex menu conj(expression1) ⇒ expression conj(list1) ⇒ list conj(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the complex conjugate of the argument. Note: All undefined variables are treated as real
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 792
    of variable var1 to var2. If var2 does not exist, CopyVar creates it. Note: CopyVar is similar to the store instruction (! ) when you are copying an expression, list, matrix, or character string except that no simplification takes place when using CopyVar. You must use CopyVar with non-algebraic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 793
    mode: cosê ({0,.2,.5}) ¸ {p2 1.369... 1.047...} cosê(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the inverse cosine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos(). In Radian angle mode and
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 794
    Returns the matrix hyperbolic cosine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the hyperbolic cosine of each element. For information about the calculation method, 1 In Radian angle mode: cot({1,2.1,3}) ¸ { 1 tan(1) L.584... tan1(3)} 796 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 795
    ¸ .293... cothL1({L2,2.1,6}) ¸ { Lln(3) 2 .518... ln(27/5)} crossP( ) MATH/Matrix/Vector ops menu crossP(list1, list2) ⇒ list Returns the cross product of list1 and list2 as ¸ ‡2 In Radian angle mode: csc({1,p/2,p/3}) ¸ { 1 sin(1) 1 2 ¦ 3 3} Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 797
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 796
    real results in real mode. cSolve(x^3=ë 1,x) ¸ solve(x^3=ë 1,x) ¸ Although the TI-89 Titanium/Voyage™ 200 processes all undefined variables that do not end with an underscore (_) as if (). cSolve(x^(1/3)=ë 1,x) ¸ solve(x^(1/3)=ë 1,x) ¸ false x = ë1 798 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 797
    =c_ù v_ and v_^2=ë u_,{u_,v_}) ¸ u_= ë( 1ì4øc_+1)2 4 and v_= 1ì4øc_+1 2 or u_= ë( 1ì4øc_ì1)2 4 and v_= ë( 1ì4øc_ì1) 2 or u_=0 and v_=0 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 799
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 798
    suffix from 1 through 255. The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or ƒ function graphing mode. Calculates the cubic polynomial regression and updates all or c1-c99 (columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 799
    matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a matrix of the program to control a custom toolbar. Manually Program listing: :Test() :Prgm :Custom :Title :Item :Item :Item :Title :Item :Item :Title :EndCustm :EndPrgm "Lists" "List1" "Scores" "L3" "Fractions" "f(x)" "h(x)" "Graph" Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 800
    three looping structures (For, While, or Loop). Program listing: :¦ Sum the integers from 1 to 100 the specified interval. The user has optional control over through the pictures, and the direction to go, circular or forward and backwards. direction 4Cylind MATH/Matrix/Vector ops menu Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 801
    ,v_}) ¸ Each row of the resulting matrix represents an alternate zero, with the components ordered the same as the varOrGuess list where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255. The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or ƒ 8:Clear Home. For e w_ì 2 i  Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 803
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 802
    }) ¸ [.494... ë.703...] cZeros({e^(z_)ì w_,w_ì z_^2}, {w_,z_=1+ i}) ¸ [.149...+4.89...øi 1.588...+1.540...øi] d( ) 2 = key or MATH/Calculus menu d(expression1, var [,order]) ⇒ . When data is saved as a matrix, empty cells will be populated with "undef." 804 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 803
    value list1 4DD ⇒ list matrix1 4DD ⇒ matrix Returns the decimal equivalent of the argument expressed in degrees. The argument is a number, list, or matrix that is interpreted by the Mode setting in gradians in decimal, regardless of the Base mode. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 805
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 804
    with the ":" character. block also can include expressions and instructions (such as If, Then, Else, and For) without program block in the Program Editor rather than on the entry line. DelFold CATALOG DelFold folderName1[, folderName2] [, folderName3] ... NewFold games ¸ Done Deletes user
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 805
    where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255. The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or ƒ 8: Clear Home. The solution ans(1),y) ¸ manual solutions, be aware that different methods introduce arbitrary constants at different points in the calculation, which may Functions and Instructions 807
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 806
    differentiation can help true verify x⋅ex 10 det( ) MATH/Matrix menu det(squareMatrix[, tol]) ⇒ is used only if the matrix has floating-point entries and does • If tol is omitted or not used, the default tolerance is calculated as: det(identity(3) ì xù [1,ë 2,3; ë 2,4,1;ë 6,ë 2,7]) ¸
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 807
    from the dialog box and variable ok is set to 1. If N is pressed, its variables are not updated, and system variable ok is set to zero. Program listing: :Dlogtest() :Prgm :Dialog :Title "This is a dialog box" :Request "Your name",Str1 :Dropdown "Month you were born", seq(string(i),i,1,12
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 808
    the Home screen, or a program can use DispHome. DispG CATALOG DispG In function graphing mode: Displays the current contents of the Graph screen. Program segment: © :5ù cos(x)! y1 resume execution if in a program. 5ù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ DispTbl ¸ 810 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 809
    . You can use 4DMS only at the end of an entry line. dotP( ) MATH/Matrix/Vector ops menu dotP(list1, list2) ⇒ expression Returns the "dot" product of two lists all drawn items. In function graphing mode and ZoomStd window: DrawInv 1.25xù cos(x) ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 811
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 810
    qmax, and qstep. Specifying values does not alter the window settings. If the current graphing mode is not polar, these three arguments are required. Note: Regraphing erases all necessary, DropDown creates varName.) See Dialog program listing example. 812 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 811
    power. Note: On the TI-89 Titanium, pressing ¥ s to display e^( is different from pressing j [E ] . On the Voyage 200, pressing 2s to display e^ squareMatrix e^([1,5,3;4,2,1;6,ë 2,1]) ¸ Returns the matrix exponential of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating e raised to the power of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 812
    the eigenvectors are computed via a Schur factorization. eigVl( ) MATH/Matrix menu eigVl(squareMatrix) ⇒ list Returns a list of the eigenvalues of EndIf © ElseIf can be used as a program instruction for program branching. EndCustm See Custom, page 801. Program segment: © :If choice=1 Then : Goto
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 813
    exact(matrix1 [, tol]) ⇒ matrix Uses Exact mode arithmetic regardless program. For more information, check the TI Web site: http://www.ti.com/calc Warning: Exec gives you access to the full power of the microprocessor. Please be aware that you can easily make a mistake that locks up the calculator
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 814
    Exit CATALOG Exit Program listing: Exits [,var]) ⇒ list expand(matrix1 [,var]) ⇒ matrix expand(expression1) returns expression1 expanded with respect to (y + 1) + (y + 1)ñ expand((x^2ì x+y^2ì y)/(x^2ù y^2ì x^2ù yì xù y^2+xù y),y) ¸ expand(ans(1),x) ¸ 816 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 815
    contained in string as an expression and immediately executes it. expr("1+2+x^2+x") ¸ xñ + x + 3 expr("expand((1+x)^2)") ¸ xñ + 2ø x + 1 "Define cube(x)=x^3"! funcstr ¸ "Define cube(x)=x^3" expr(funcstr) ¸ Done cube(2) ¸ 8 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 817
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 816
    graphing mode: Calculates the exponential regression and updates c1-c99 (columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be (x + ‡3)ø (x ì ‡3) factor(x^2ì a,x) ¸ (x + ‡a)ø (x ì ‡a) 818 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 817
    a 100-digit number could take more than a century. factor(152417172689) ¸ 123457ø1234577 isPrime(152417172689) . Fill MATH/Matrix menu Fill expression, matrixVar ⇒ matrix Replaces each element floor(list1) ⇒ list floor(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a list or matrix of the floor of each element. Note
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 818
    . FnOff [1] [, 2] ... [,99] Deselects the specified Y= functions for the current graphing mode. In function graphing mode: FnOff 1,3 ¸ deselects y1(x) and y3(x). In parametric graphing mode: FnOff 1,3 ¸ deselects xt1(t), yt1(t), xt3(t), and yt3(t). 820 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 819
    the other graph modes, previously selected functions are not affected. For CATALOG For var, low, high [, step] Program segment: the number of digits to display after the decimal point. S[n]: Scientific format. n is the number of digits to display after the A: Functions and Instructions 821
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 820
    ) ⇒ list fPart(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the fractional part of the .003} For a list or matrix, returns the fractional parts of graph piecewise-defined functions. In function graphing x:EndIf:EndFunc ¸ Done Graph g(x) ¸ gcd( ) gcd(matrix1, matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the greatest common divisors
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 821
    port. If port = 2, the TI-89 Titanium waits for data from the I/O port. getConfg() CATALOG getConfg() ⇒ ListPairs Returns a list of calculator attributes. The attribute name is listed first, followed by its value. getConfg() ¸ {"Product Name" "Advanced Mathematics Software" "Version" "2.00, 09/25
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 822
    themselves; however, they modify the keycodes of the key that follows them. For example 2 Ù. For a listing of key codes, see Appendix B. Program listing: :Disp :Loop : getKey()! key : while key=0 : getKey()! key : EndWhile : Disp key : If key = ord("a") : Stop :EndLoop 824 Appendix A: Functions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 823
    " "FULL" "Split 1 App" "Home" "Split 2 App" "Graph" Note: To set or return information about the "Number of Graphs" "1" Unit System mode, use setUnits() or getUnits() "Graph 2" "FUNCTION" instead of setMode : 12 = 12 hour clock 24 = 24 hour clock Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 825
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 824
    , e) Function Graph data base List Matrix Variable does not exist Real number Miscellaneous data type for future use by software applications Picture Program String Text type " "Charge" "_coul" ... } Note: Your screen may display different default units. 826 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 825
    xExpr, yExpr, t Polar graphing Graph expr, q Sequence graphing Not allowed. 3D graphing Graph expr, x, y Diff Equations graphing Not allowed. Note: Use ClrGraph to clear these functions, or go to the Y= Editor to re-enable the system Y= functions. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 827
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 826
    0h100 0hF0F identity( ) MATH/Matrix menu identity(expression) ⇒ matrix Returns the identity matrix with a dimension of expression block before continuing execution. Program segment: © :If x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 827
    matrix Returns a matrix program, displays the current Graph screen, and lets you update graph cursor. When you press ¸, the program resumes. Program segment: © :¦ Get 10 points from the Graph Screen :For i,1,10 : Input : xc! XLIST[i] : yc! YLIST[i] :EndFor © Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 828
    string so that " " are not required. Program segment: © :InputStr "Enter Your Name",str1 ⇒ integer int(list1) ⇒ list int(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the greatest integer that is less than or equal 16},{5,4,ë 3}) ¸ {2 ë 3 5} integrate See ‰(), page 907. 830 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 829
    iPart( ) MATH/Number menu iPart(number) ⇒ integer iPart(list1) ⇒ list iPart(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns the integer part of the argument. iPart(ë 1.234) ¸ ë 1. iPart({3/2,ë 2.3,7.003}) ¸ {1 ë 2. 7.} exists. Returns false if var_name does not exist. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 831
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 830
    . See Custom example. Lbl CATALOG Lbl labelName Defines a label with the name labelName in the program. You can use a Goto labelName instruction to transfer program control to the instruction immediately following the label. labelName must meet the same naming requirements as a variable name
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 831
    ⇒ list limit(matrix1, var, point[, direction]) ⇒ matrix Returns the limit requested. direction: negative=from left, positive Line xStart, yStart, xEnd, yEnd[, drawMode] Displays the Graph screen and draws, erases, or inverts a line segment between ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 833
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 832
    LineHorz CATALOG LineHorz y [, drawMode] Displays the Graph screen and draws, erases, or inverts a horizontal line at window position y. If drawMode = 1, draws the line (default). If all drawn items. See also PxlHorz. In a ZoomStd window: LineHorz 2.5 ¸ 834 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 833
    , list2[, [list3] [, list4, list5]] Calculates the linear regression and updates all the system statistics variables. All the lists the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not NewPlot 1,1,L1,L2 ¸ Done have to be a variable name and cannot be c1- c99. ¥% Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 835
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 834
    {ln(3) + pø i .182... ln(5)} ln(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix natural logarithm of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the natural logarithm of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos() on. squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 835
    graphing mode: Calculates the logarithmic regression and updates in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 program executes. Lock CATALOG Lock var1[, var2] ... Locks the specified variables. This prevents you from accidentally deleting or changing the variable without first using the unlock instruction
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 836
    llnn((150))} log(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix base-expression2 logarithm of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the base-expression2 logarithm of each element. For information - log(5,5)4logbase(5) ¸ log 5(30) log 5(3) 838 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 837
    graphing mode: Calculates the logistic regression and updates -c99 (columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not have to be a variable name and instruction is executed within block. block is a sequence of statements separated with the ":" character. Program
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 838
    0 0 1 • If tol is omitted or not used, the default tolerance is calculated as: 5Eë 14 ù max(dim(matrix)) ù rowNorm(matrix) The LU factorization algorithm uses partial pivoting with row interchanges. [m,n;o,p]!m1 ¸ LU m1, the default is "max column." 840 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 839
    filled with the elements in matrix. The elements are copied from matrix row by row. mat4list list2) ⇒ list max(matrix1, matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the maximum of the two arguments. If max(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a row vector ]) ⇒ matrix Returns list1. median(matrix1) ⇒ matrix Returns a row vector
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 840
    list4, list5]] Calculates the median-median line and updates all the the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be c1- c99. In function graphing mode: {0,1,2,3,4,5,6}! {9 8} {} mid({"A","B","C","D"},2,2) ¸ {"B" "C"} 842 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 841
    oldFolder to newFolder. If newFolder does not exist, MoveVar creates it. {1,2,3,4}! L1 ¸ {1 2 3 4} MoveVar L1,Main,Games ¸ Done mRow( ) MATH/Matrix/Row ops menu mRow(expression, matrix1, index) ⇒ matrix Returns a copy of matrix1 with each element in row index of matrix1 multiplied by expression
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 842
    the new variable current in the Data/Matrix Editor. NewData mydata,{1,2,3},{4,5,6} ¸ Done (Go to the Data/Matrix Editor and open the var mydata to display the data variable below.) NewData dataVar, matrix Creates data variable dataVar based on matrix. 844 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 843
    NewData sysData, matrix Loads the contents of matrix into the system data variable sysData. NewFold CATALOG NewFold folderName NewFold games ¸ Done Creates a user-defined folder with the name folderName, and then sets the current folder to that folder. After you execute this instruction, you are
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 844
    number n. type specifies the type of the graph plot. 1 = scatter plot 2 = columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor), except for includeCatList, which does not have begin a new problem from a cleared state without resetting the memory. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 845
    integration. Integration limits can depend on integration variables outside them. Note: See also ‰(). nInt(nInt(e^(ë xù y)/‡(x^2ì y^2), y,ë x,x),x,0,1) ¸ 3.304... norm( ) MATH/Matrix/Norms menu norm(matrix size list. nPr({5,4,3},{2,4,2}) ¸ {20 24 6} Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 847
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 846
    same size matrix. nPr([6,5;4,3],[2,2;2,2]) solutions, you can use a guess to help find a particular solution. For example, " If you use nSolve() in a program, you can use getType() to check ¸ Calculates 1-variable statistics and updates all Data/Matrix Editor). list4 does not have to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 847
    Print = ON, exprOrString is "pretty printed." © :RandSeed 1147 :ClrIO :For i,1,90,10 : Output i, rand(100),"Hello" :EndFor © Result after execution: From the Program I/O screen, you can press ‡ to display the Home screen, or a program can use DispHome. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 849
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 848
    ) ⇒ list P4Ry(rMatrix, qMatrix) ⇒ matrix Returns the equivalent y-coordinate of the (r, part(expression1[ ,nonNegativeInteger]) This advanced programming function lets you identify and extract pù x is calculated, the result is added to 3, and then the cosine is calculated. cos() is Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 849
    instead of part(xù yù z,1) ¸ yøx xøy. When you extract sub-expressions from a matrix, part([a,b,c;x,y,z],0) ¸ "{" remember that matrices are stored as lists of lists, part([a,b,c;x,y,z]) ¸ "{" part(temp) ¸ 3 part(temp,3) ¸ z delVar temp ¸ Done Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 851
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 850
    Program Editor function to the right uses getType() and part() to partially implement symbolic differentiation. Studying and completing this function can help teach you how to differentiate manually clause in the program should use pad to scroll the display. Program execution resumes when you press
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 851
    graph. If you do not include any arguments, turns on all plots. 4Polar MATH/Matrix/Vector ops menu vector 4Polar Displays vector in polar form [r q]. The vector must be of dimension 2 and can be a row or a column. [1,3.] 4Polar ¸ [x,y] 4Polar ¸ Note: 4Polar is a display-format instruction
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 852
    c1- c99. In function graphing mode: {1,2,3,4,5,6,7}! L1 ¸ {1,2,3,4,3,4,6}! L2 ¸ PowerReg L1,L2 ¸ ShowStat ¸ ¸ Regeq(x)"y1(x) ¸ NewPlot 1,1,L1,L2 ¸ ¥% {1 2 3 ...} {1 2 3 ...} Done Done Done Prgm CATALOG Prgm © EndPrgm Required instruction that identifies the beginning of a program. Last line of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 853
    ]]) ⇒ matrix Returns [, var3] ... Displays a prompt on the Program I/O screen for each variable in the argument have at least one argument. Program segment: © Prompt A,B,C © PtChg through PtText show continuing similar examples. Displays the Graph screen and reverses the screen PtChg 2,4 ¸ pixel
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 854
    pixel nearest to window coordinates (x, y) is on. PtText CATALOG PtText string, x, y Displays the Graph screen and places the character string string on the screen at the pixel nearest the specified (x, y) erases all drawn items. See also LineHorz. 856 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 855
    ,1 ¸ PxlHorz 25,1 ¸ PxlOff 25,50 ¸ PxlOn CATALOG PxlOn row, col PxlOn rowList, colList Displays the Graph screen and turns on the pixel at pixel coordinates (row, col). Note: Regraphing erases all drawn items. 25 items. PxlText "sample text",20,50 ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 857
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 856
    Matrix menu QR matrix, qMatName, rMatName[ , tol] Calculates the Householder QR factorization of a real or complex matrix matrix to be calculated in calculated as: 5Eë 14 ù max(dim(matrix)) ù rowNorm(matrix orthonormal basis vectors that span the space defined by matrix. QR m1,qm,rm ¸ Done qm ¸ m
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 857
    in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not NewPlot 1,1,L1,L2 ¸ Done have to be a variable name and cannot be c1-c99 . ¥% QuartReg MATH/Statistics/Regressions menu QuartReg list1, list2[, [list3] [, list4, list5]] Calculates the quartic polynomial regression and updates the system statistics
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 858
    xExpression, yExpression) ⇒ expression R4Pq (xList, yList) ⇒ list R4Pq (xMatrix, yMatrix) ⇒ matrix Returns the equivalent q-coordinate of the (x,y) pair arguments. Note: The result is returned as seed.) rand() ¸ rand(6) ¸ rand(ë 100) ¸ .158... 5 ë 49 860 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 859
    ë66   0 4 ë6 Note: The values in this matrix will change each time you press ¸ randNorm( ) MATH/Probability menu it. RclPic CATALOG RclPic picVar [, row, column] Displays the Graph screen and adds the picture stored in picVar at the upper x Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 861
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 860
    /Matrix/Vector ops menu vector 4Rect Displays vector in rectangular form [x, y, z]. The vector must be of dimension 2 or 3 and can be a row or a column. Note: 4Rect is a display-format instruction, not a conversion function. You can use it only at the end of an entry line, and it does not update
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 861
    ⇒ list remain(matrix1, matrix2) ⇒ matrix Returns the remainder of the first argument inside a Dialog...EndDlog construct, it creates an input box for the user to type in data. If it is a stand-alone instruction Use Return without an argument to exit a program. factoral(3) ¸ 6 Note: Enter the text
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 862
    left. If #of Rotations is negative, the rotation is to the right. The default is ë 1 (rotate right one element). rotate({1,2,3,4},ë 2) ¸ rotate({1,2,3,4},1) ¸ {3 4 1 2} {2 3 4 1} 864 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 863
    /Matrix/Norms menu rowNorm(matrix) ⇒ expression rowNorm([-5,6,-7;3,4,9;9,-9,-7]) ¸ 25 Returns the maximum of the sums of the absolute values of the elements in the rows in matrix. Note: All matrix elements must simplify to numbers. See also colNorm(). Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 864
    matrix Returns matrix1 with rows rIndex1 and rIndex2 exchanged. [1,2;3,4;5,6]! Mat ¸ rowSwap(Mat,1,3) ¸ 13 24 5 6 53 64 1 2 RplcPic CATALOG RplcPic picVar[, row][, column] Clears the Graph omitted or not used, the default tolerance is calculated as: 5Eë 14 ù max(dim(matrix1 Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 865
    GetCalc from a program. If you send from a TI-89, TI-92 Plus, or Voyage™ 200 to a TI-92, an error occurs if the TI-92 executes GetCalc from a program. In this case, the sending unit must use SendChat instead. Program segment: © :a+b! x :SendCalc x © Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 867
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 866
    -92, Voyage™ 200, or TI-92 Plus to be used). Refer to SendCalc for more information. © :a+b! x :SendChat x © SendChat sends a variable only if that variable is compatible with the TI-92, which is typically true in "chat" programs. However, SendChat will not send an archived variable, a TI-89 graph
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 867
    the table below. setGraph("Graph Order","Seq") ¸ "SEQ graph mode. 3Applies only to 3D graph mode. 4Applies only to Sequence graph mode. 5Applies only to Diff Equations graph mode. 6Applies only to Function graphing mode, when "Graph Order" is set to "Seq." Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 868
    "Window Editor", "Graph", "Table", "Data/Matrix Editor", "Program Editor", "Text Editor", "Numeric Solver", "Flash App" "Home", "Y= Editor", "Window Editor", "Graph", "Table", "Data/Matrix Editor", "Program Editor", "Text Editor", "Numeric Solver", "Flash App" Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 869
    "Number of Graphs" "Graph2" "Split Screen Ratio" "Exact/Approx" "Base" "Language" "Apps Desktop" "1", "2" "Function", "Parametric", "Polar", "Sequence", "3D", "Diff Equations" "1:1", "1:2", "2:1" (Voyage™ 200 only) "Auto 24 = 24 hour clock {10 44 49} Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 871
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 870
    and unit pair specifies a category and its default unit. (You can specify built-in units only, not user-defined units.) Any category not specified will use its previous setUnits({"CUSTOM","Length", "_cm","Mass","_gm"}) ¸ {" var or with getUnits() ! var. 872 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 871
    shading is available on the Shade cos(x),sin(x),0,5,2 ¸ Graph screen through the Shade instruction. Automatic shading of a specific function is available through the Style instruction. Shade is not valid in 3D graphing mode. ¥" ClrDraw ¸ Done Shade cos(x),sin(x),0,5,2,1 ¸ Appendix
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 872
    ("abcd",ë 2) ¸ shift("abcd",1) ¸ " ab" "bcd " Characters introduced at the beginning or end of string by the shift are set to a space. 874 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 873
    cleared automatically if the data to compute them has changed. Use this instruction after a statistics calculation, such as LinReg. {1,2,3,4,5}! L1 ¸ {0,2,6,10,25}! L2 ¸ less than tol. This tolerance is used only if the matrix has floating-point entries and does not contain any symbolic variables
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 874
    ) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix sine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the sine of each element. For information about the calculation method, refer to cos(). In Radian angle mode: sinê ({0,.2,.5}) ¸ {0 .201... .523...} 876 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 875
    matrix hyperbolic sine of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the hyperbolic sine of each element. For information about the calculation .572...  squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable. The result always contains floating-point numbers. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 877
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 876
    list4] ] In function graphing mode: Calculates the sinusoidal regression and updates all the system statistics c1-c99 (columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor). list4 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be = a 878 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 877
    (or instead) include solution solve(x^2+y^2=r^2 and variables that do not appear in the equations. For (xì r)^2+y^2=r^2,{x,y,z}) ¸ example, you can include z as a solution variable Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 879
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 878
    arbitrary constants of the form @k, where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255. The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or ƒ 8:Clear Home. x= r 2 and y= 3ør 2 SortD list1,list2 ¸ list1 ¸ list2 ¸ {2 1 4 3} {1 2 3 4} Done {4 3 2 1} {3 4 1 2} 880 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 879
    4Sphere MATH/Matrix/Vector ops menu vector 4Sphere Displays the row or column vector in spherical form [r q f]. vector must be of dimension 3 and can be either a row or a column vector. Note: 4Sphere is a display-format instruction, not a conversion function. You can use it only at the end of an
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 880
    ¸ stdDevPop({1.3,2.5,L6.4},{3,2,5}) ¸ stdDevPop(matrix1[, freqmatrix]) ⇒ matrix Returns a row vector of the population standard deviations of RclGDB GDBvar to restore the graph environment. *Note: These items are saved for both graphs in 2-Graph mode. 882 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 881
    Stop CATALOG Stop Used as a program instruction to stop program execution. Program segment: © For i,1,10,1 If i=5 Stop EndFor © StoPic CATALOG StoPic picVar [, pxlRow, pxlCol] [, width, height] Displays the graph screen and copies a rectangular area of the display to the variable picVar.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 882
    10)) ¸ 55 elements. sum({1,3,5,7,9},3) ¸ 21 sum(matrix1[, start[, end]]) ⇒ matrix sum([1,2,3;4,5,6]) ¸ [5 7 9] Returns a row vector containing the sums of the integer1 is ignored if the TI-89 Titanium/Voyage™ 200 is not displaying a split screen. 884 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 883
    T (transpose) MATH/Matrix menu matrix1î ⇒ matrix Returns the complex conjugate transpose of matrix1. [1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9]! mat1 ¸ 14 2 5 36 7 8 9 mat1î ¸  of this instruction are: Function graphing: Table expr, x Parametric graphing: Table xExpr, yExpr, t Polar graphing: Table expr
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 884
    200 • tan ( π 4 ) π tan(50) ¸ 1 tan({0,50,100}) ¸ {0 1 undef} In Radian angle mode: tan(p/4) ¸ 1 tan(45¡) ¸ 1 tan({p,p/3,-p,p/4}) ¸ {0 ‡3 0 1} tan(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix In Radian angle mode: Returns the matrix tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 885
    i} tanhê(squareMatrix1) ⇒ squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic tangent of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic tangent of each element. is the expansion point. expand(taylor(x/(xù(xì1)), x,4)/x,x) ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 887
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 886
    the character string promptString dialog Done box. If used as part of a Dialog...EndDlog block, promptString is displayed inside that dialog box. If used as a standalone instruction, Text creates a dialog box to display the string. Then See If, page 828. timeCnv() CATALOG timeCnv(seconds
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 887
    When present, it allows the menu choice to branch to a specified label inside the program. Program segment: © :Dialog :Title :Request :Dropdown :EndDlog © "This is @tmpCnv(1_¡c,_¡f) ¸ 1.8ø_¡F Note: To select temperature units from a menu, press: ¥ À Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 889
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 888
    with three choices that branch to three places in the program. Trace CATALOG Trace Draws a Smart Graph and places the trace cursor on the first defined Y= function at the previously defined cursor position, or at the reset position if regraphing was necessary. Allows operation of the cursor
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 889
    Calculates the TwoVar statistics and updates all -c99 (columns in the last data variable shown in the Data/Matrix Editor). list5 does not have to be a variable name and 10!arctest ¸ 10 Moves the specified variables from the user data archive memory to RAM. Archive arctest ¸ 5ù Instructions 891
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 890
    (matrix1[, freqmatrix]) ⇒ matrix Returns a row vector containing Graph when(x
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 891
    when() is helpful for defining recursive functions. when(n>0,nù factoral(nì 1),1) block can be either a single statement or a sequence of statements separated with the ":" character. Program segment: © :1! i :0! temp :While i
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 892
    picVar[, row] [, column] Displays the picture stored in picVar on the current Graph screen. Uses xor logic for each pixel. Only those pixel positions that are exclusive to either the screen or the picture are turned on. This instruction turns off pixels that are turned on in both images. picVar must
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 893
    an alternate zero, with the components ordered the same as the varOrGuess list. To extract a row, index the matrix by [row]. zeros({x^2+y^2ì r^2, (xì r)^2+y^2ì r^2},{x,y}) ¸ r 2 r 2 Extract row 2: ans(1)[2] ¸ r2 3ør  2 ë 3ør 2  ë 23ør Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 895
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 894
    from 1 through 255. The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or updates the window. In function graphing mode: 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ ZoomStd:ZoomBox ¸ Done 1st corner 2nd corner The display after defining ZoomBox by pressing ¸ the second time. 896 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 895
    5} Done ¥" ZoomData ¸ ZoomDec CATALOG ZoomDec In function graphing mode: Adjusts the viewing window so that @x and 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ Done @y = 0.1 and displays the Graph screen with the ZoomStd ¸ origin centered on the screen. ¥" ZoomDec ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 897
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 896
    ZoomFit CATALOG ZoomFit In function graphing mode: Displays the Graph screen, and calculates the 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ Done necessary In function graphing mode: Displays the Graph screen, lets you set a center 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ Done point for a zoom in, and updates the viewing
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 897
    before the last zoom. ZoomRcl CATALOG ZoomRcl Displays the Graph screen, and updates the viewing window using the settings stored with the ZoomSto instruction. ZoomSqr CATALOG ZoomSqr In function graphing mode: Displays the Graph screen, adjusts the x or y 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ Done window
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 898
    24, and xscl to p/2, centers the origin, sets the y settings to [ë 4, 4, .5], and updates the viewing window. In function graphing mode: 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ ZoomStd ¸ In function graphing mode: 1.25xù cos(x)! y1(x) ¸ ZoomStd ¸ Done Done ¥" ZoomTrig ¸ + (add) « key expression1 + expression2
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 899
    20}+15 ¸ {25 30 35} {25 30 35} expression + matrix1 ⇒ matrix matrix1 + expression ⇒ matrix Returns a matrix with expression added to each element on the diagonal of matrix1. matrix1 must be square of expression1 and expression2. xù yù x ¸ 6.9 x2ø y Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 901
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 900
    a b2} matrix1 ù matrix2 ⇒ matrix Returns the matrix product of matrix1 and matrix2. The matrix matrix1 ù expression ⇒ matrix [1,2;3,4]ù.01 ¸ [..0013 ..0024] Returns a matrix aø b} matrix1 à expression ⇒ matrix [a,b,c]/(aù bù c) ¸ Returns a matrix containing the quotients of matrix1àexpression
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 901
    returns a matrix that is the difference between each pair of corresponding elements in matrix1 and matrix2. expression .ì matrix1 returns a matrix that is the difference of expression and each element in matrix1. [a,2;b,3].ì [c,4;d,5] ¸ x.ì [c,4;d,5] ¸ Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 903
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 902
    power) ¶ Z keys matrix1 .^ matrix2 ⇒ matrix expression . ^ matrix1 ⇒ matrix matrix1 .^ matrix2 returns a matrix where each element in matrix2 is the exponent letter O. 0b11111111111111111111111111011011 ans(1) 4dec ¸ ë 37 Note: To type 4, press 2 . 904 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 903
    10 Then : Return 3 :EndIf :EndFunc Graph g(x) ¸ ≠ ¥ Á key expression1 ≠ expression2 ⇒ Boolean expression list1 ≠ list2 ⇒ Boolean list matrix1 ≠ matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix See "=" (equal) example. Returns true , returns comparisons element by element. Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 905
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 904
    expression1 ≥ expression2 ⇒ Boolean expression list1 ≥ list2 ⇒ Boolean list matrix1 ≥ matrix2 ⇒ Boolean matrix See "=" (equal) example. Returns true if expression1 is determined to be greater than or and matrices, returns comparisons element by element. 906 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 905
    matrix 5! ¸ {5,4,3}! ¸ Returns the factorial of the argument. For a list or matrix, returns a list or matrix of factorials of the elements. [1,2;3,4]! ¸ The TI-89 integration such as C is omitted. However, lower is added as a constant of integration ClrGraph:Graph tmp(x):Graph 1/(2ì cos(x)):Graph
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 906
    integration is inapplicable or fails. ‰() can be nested to do multiple integrals. Integration limits can depend on integration , var, low, high) ⇒ ë G ( expression1, G(k,k,4,1) ¸ ë5 var, high+1, lowì 1) if high < lowì 1 G(k,k,4,1)+G(k,k,2,4) ¸ 4 908 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 907
    variables from a program using strings. Program segment: © :Request "Enter Your Name",str1 :NewFold #str1 © © :For i,1,5,1 : ClrGraph : Graph iù x : StoPic #("pic" & string(i)) :EndFor © G (gradian) MATH/Angle menu expression1G ¡ ⇒ expression list1G ¡ ⇒ list matrix1G ¡ ⇒ matrix This function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 908
    : ¥ À to select units from a menu, or you can type the unit names directly. 3_m 4 _ft ¸ Note: To type 4, press 2 . 9.842...ø_ft 910 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 909
    Returns 10 raised to the power of squareMatrix1. This is not the same as calculating 10 raised to the power of each element. For information about 19..194536......EE76 in list1. 3.1^ë 1 ¸ .322581 {a,4,ë.1,xì 2}^ë 1 ¸ {1a 1 4 ë 10. 1 xì 2} Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 911
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 910
    . If var already exists and if it is not locked or protected, replaces its contents with expression, list, or matrix. p/4! myvar ¸ 2cos(x)! Y1(x) ¸ {1,2,3,4}! Lst5 ¸ [1,2,3;4,5,6]! MatG ¸ "Hello"! str1 ¸ p 4 Done {1 such as a, b, c, x, y, z, etc. 912 Appendix A: Functions and Instructions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 911
    10). 0b10+0hF+10 ¸ In Hex base mode: 0b10+0hF+10 ¸ Results are displayed according to the Base mode. 27 0b11011 0h1B Appendix A: Functions and Instructions 913
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 912
    Appendix B: Technical Reference This section contains a comprehensive list of TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 error messages and character codes. It also includes information about how certain TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 operations are calculated. Appendix B: Technical Reference 906
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 913
    TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 Error Messages This section lists error messages that may be displayed when input or internal errors are encountered. The number to the left of each error message represents an internal error number that is not displayed. If the error occurs inside be a matrix 110 graph
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 914
    ´ key was pressed during a long calculation or during program execution. 185 Checksum error 190 Circular Dependent limit A limit of integration is dependent on the integration variable. For example, ä‰(x^2,x,1,x) is not allowed. 225 Diff Eq setup 230 Dimension A list or matrix index is not valid.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 915
    exist. 335 Graph functions y1 Matrix Editor, and Solver as well as system prompts such as Lower Bound cannot contain any commands or a colon (:). See also "Creating and Evaluating User-Defined Functions" in the Calculator matrix For example, a list inside a list such as {2,{3,4}} is
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 916
    command is valid only inside these loop blocks. 570 Invalid pathname For example, \\var is invalid. 575 Invalid polar complex 580 Invalid program reference Programs cannot be referenced within cable is connected firmly to both units. 665 Matrix not diagonalizable Appendix B: Technical Reference 910
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 917
    by very low memory conditions inside the Data/Matrix Editor. 830 Overflow 840 Plot setup 850 Program not found A program reference inside another program could not be found in the provided path during execution. 855 Rand type functions not allowed in 3D graphing 860 Recursion is limited to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 918
    895 900 910 930 940 950 955 960 965 970 980 990 1000 1010 Slope fields need one selected function and are used for 1st-order equations only Stat Syntax The structure of the entry is incorrect. For example, x+ - y (x plus minus y) is invalid; whereas, x+-y (x plus negative y) is correct. Too few
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 919
    variables, graph databases, programs, etc. Note: For detailed information about using folders, see Calculator Home Screen. 1:main Default folder included with the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200. 2: - Other folders are available only if they have (custom folders) been created by a user. Display
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 920
    NORMAL, but the answer cannot be displayed in the number of digits selected by Display Digits, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 displays the answer in SCIENTIFIC notation. If Display Digits = FLOAT, scientific notation will be used for exponents of 12 or more and exponents of -4 or less. Complex
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 921
    the Operating the Calculator module. Split Screen Lets you split the screen into two parts. For example, you can display a graph and see the App, Split 2 App, Number of Graphs, and Split Screen Ratio. (Split Screen Ratio is available on the Voyage™ 200 only.) Split 1 App and Split 2 App Specifies
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 922
    or right part. Exact/Approx Specifies how fractional and symbolic expressions are calculated and displayed. By retaining rational and symbolic forms in the EXACT setting, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 increases precision by eliminating most numeric rounding errors. 1:AUTO Uses EXACT setting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 923
    Base Lets you perform calculations by entering numbers in decimal, binary, or hexadecimal form. 1:DEC 2:HEX 3:BIN Decimal numbers use 0 - 9 in the base 10 format Hexadecimal numbers use 0 - 9 and A - F in
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 924
    within the same category, and create your own user-defined units. 1:SI 2:ENG/US 3:CUSTOM localize the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 into one App that is displayed in full screen mode. • Does not display the navigable Apps desktop. • The unit defaults to the calculator Home screen. • The calculator
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 925
    TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 Character Codes The char() function lets you refer to any character by its numeric character code. For example, to display 2 on the Program 78. N 79. O 80. P 81. Q 82. R 83. S 84. T 85. U 86. V 87. W 88. X 89. Y 90. Z 91. [ 92. \ 93. ] 94. ^ 95. _ 96. ` 97. a 98. b 99. c
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 926
    TI-89 Titanium Key Codes The getKey() function returns a value that corresponds to the last key pressed, according to the tables shown in this section. For example, if your program 270 F3 270 F3 270 Graph 8462 F3 270 † F4 ESC 264 O APPS 265 APPS 265 Switch 4361 8457 APPS 265 " HOME
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 927
    Table 1: Key Codes for Primary Keys Key None Modifier Û¤ 2 ¥ j Assoc. Value Assoc. Value Assoc. Value Assoc. Value Assoc Value CR STO4 = EE - 13 CR 258 P 61 A 149 K 173 SPACE 13 ENTRY 4109 Approx 8205 CR 13 80 RCL 4354 @ 64 p 112 65 ' 39 "# 157 a 97 75 , 159 SYMB 8341
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 928
    Σ 142 τ 144 ω 148 Ω 147 ξ 138 ψ 146 ζ 135 Voyage™ 200 Key Codes The getKey() function returns a value that corresponds to the last key pressed, according to the tables shown in this section. For example, if your program contains a getKey() function, pressing 2 ƒ will return a value of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 929
    MODE 266 MODE 266 8458 CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 8455 LN ESC 262 LN 264 ESC 262 e x 264 QUIT 4358 4360 8454 8456 APPS 265 APPS 265 SWITCH 4361 8457 CR SIN COS TAN ^ 13 CR 259 SIN 260 COS 261 TAN 94 ^ 13 ENTRY 259 SIN-1 260 COS-1 261
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 930
    8269 N n 110 N 78 Table 7 NEW 8270 O o 111 O 79 Table 8 OPEN 8271 P p 112 P Q q 113 Q R r 114 R Appendix B: Technical Reference 80 _ 81 ? 82 @ 95 UNITS 63 CALCHOME 64 GRAPH 924 8272 8273 8274
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 931
    8275 T t 116 T 84 # 35 TBLSET 8276 U u 117 U 85 Table 9 8277 V v 118 V 86 ≠ 157 PASTE 8278 W w 119 W 87 ! 33 Y= 8279 X x 120 X 88 ¦ 169 CUT 8280 Y y 121 Y 89 4 18 TABLE 8281 Z z 122 Z 90 CAPS 8282 Appendix B: Technical Reference 925
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 932
    modifier only affects the arrow keys. Table 3: Grave Accent Letters (prefixed by 2 A) Key Assoc. Normal ¤ A à 224 192 E è 232 200 I ì 236 204 O ò 242 210 U ù 249 217 Table 4: Cedilla Letters (prefixed by 2 C) Key Assoc. Normal ¤ C ç 231 199 Appendix B: Technical
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 933
    Table 5: Acute Accent Letters (prefixed by 2 E) Key Assoc. Normal Û¤ A á 225 193 E é 233 201 I í 237 205 O ó 243 211 U ú 250 218 Y ý 253 221 Table 6: Greek Letters (prefixed by 2 G) Key Assoc. Normal Û¤ A α 128 B β 129 D δ 133 132 E ε 134 F φ 145 G
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 934
    Table 7: Tilde Letters (prefixed by 2 N) Key Assoc. Normal Û¤ N ñ 241 209 O õ 245 Table 8: Caret Letters (prefixed by 2 O) Key Assoc. Normal ¤ A â 226 194 E ê 234 202 I î 238 206 O ô 244 212 U û 251 219 Table 9: Umlaut Letters (prefixed by 2 U) Key Assoc.
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 935
    Entering Complex Numbers You can enter complex numbers in the polar form (rù, q), where r is the magnitude and q is the angle, or polar form re iq. You can also enter complex numbers in rectangular form a+bi . Overview of Complex Numbers A complex number has real and imaginary components that
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 936
    according to the Angle mode setting. TI-89 Titanium: j [R] ¥ s 2 ) ¥ Ï d Ð or - c j [R] 2 ' ¥ Ï d Important: Do not use the re iq polar form in Degree angle mode. It will cause a Domain error. Note: To get the e symbol, press: TI89 Titanium: ¥ s. Voyage™ 200: 2 s Do not simply type an alphabetic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 937
    cSolve() and cZeros(), use Method 1. Complex Numbers and Degree Mode Radian angle mode is recommended for complex number calculations. Internally, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 converts all entered trig values to radians, but it does not convert values for exponential, logarithmic, or hyperbolic
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 938
    coordinate values (xc, yc, zc, etc.) are updated with a maximum of 12-digit accuracy. System Variables and Reserved Names This section lists the names of system variables and reserved function names that are used by the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200. Only those system variables and reserved function
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 939
    zc qc nc zfact xmin xgrid ymin ygrid xres zmin zmax eyef eyeψ qmax qstep tstep t0 diftol dtime fldres nmin plotStep sysMath Graph Zoom zxmin zymin zxres ztmin ztmaxde zzmax zeyeψ zpltstep zxmax zymax zqmin ztmax ztstepde zzscl znmin zxscl zyscl zqmax ztstep ztplotde zeyeq
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 940
    tblStart @tbl tblInput Data/Matrix c1-c99 sysData* Miscellaneous main ok errornum Solver eqn* exp* EOS (Equation Operating System) Hierarchy This section describes the Equation Operating System (EOSé) that is used by the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200. Numbers, variables, and functions
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 941
    calculations inside a pair of parentheses, brackets, or braces are evaluated first. For example, in the expression 4(1+2), EOS first evaluates the portion of the expression inside Because the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 allows you modification of variables from inside a program. For example, if
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 942
    section describes how the statistical regressions are calculated. Least-Squares Algorithm Most of the attempts to recursively estimate the constants in the model expression to make J as small as possible. For example, y=a sin(bx+c)+d is the model equation for SinReg. So its residual expression
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 943
    least-squares algorithm and transformed values ln(x) and y to fit the model equation: y=a+b ln(x) Uses the least-squares algorithm to fit the model equation: y=a/(1+b*e^(c*x))+d Uses the median-median line (resistant line) technique to calculate summary points x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, and y3, and fits
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 944
    , the difference between the point's z value and the contour value is calculated. • A sign change between any two adjacent points implies that a contour -Kutta Method For Runge-Kutta integrations of ordinary differential equations, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 uses the Bogacki-Shampine 3(2)
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 945
    3rd-order accuracy and an error estimate based on an embedded 2nd-order formula. For a problem of the form: y' = ƒ(x, y) and a given step size h, the Bogacki-Shampine (New York: Chapman & Hall, 1994). The TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 software does not adjust the step size to land on particular
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 946
    are installed. Replace the lithium backup battery about every three or four years. Note: To avoid loss of information stored in memory, the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage 200 must be off. Do not remove the alkaline batteries and the lithium battery at the same time. Effects of Replacing the Batteries If
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 947
    according to the polarity (+ and -) diagram inside the battery compartment. 6. Replace the battery snaps closed. Replacing the Lithium Battery in the TI-89 Titanium To replace the lithium backup battery, Replacing the Alkaline Batteries in the Voyage 200 1. If the Voyage™ 200 is on, turn it off (
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 948
    Replacing the Lithium Battery in the Voyage 200 To replace the lithium backup battery, remove the battery cover. Insert a blunt object into the circular indentation next to the battery. Gently place a finger on
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 949
    have difficulty operating the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200, the following suggestions may help you correct the problem. If: You cannot possible. A calculation is in progress. If you want to stop the calculation, press ´. A graph or program is paused and the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage 200 is waiting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 950
    If: The TI-89 Titanium appears to be "locked up" and will not respond to keyboard input. The Voyage™ 200 appears to be "locked up" and will not respond to keyboard input. Suggested action: The following action clears RAM. This erases all data, programs, and user-defined variables, functions, or
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 951
    for these strings. The following examples show how to substitute digits in the setMode( ) function. Example 1: A program using alpha parameter/mode strings: setMode("Graph","Sequence") Example 2: The same program, substituting digits for those strings: setMode("1","4") Appendix C: Programmer
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 952
    setMode( ) and getMode( ) Parameter/Mode Setting ALL Graph FUNCTION PARAMETRIC POLAR SEQUENCE 3D DIFF EQUATIONS DisplayDigits FIX 0 FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4 FIX 5 FIX 6 FIX 7 FIX 8 Strings 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 952
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 953
    Parameter/Mode Setting FIX 9 FIX 10 FIX 11 FIX 12 FLOAT FLOAT 1 FLOAT 2 FLOAT 3 FLOAT 4 FLOAT 5 FLOAT 6 FLOAT 7 FLOAT 8 FLOAT 9 FLOAT 10 FLOAT 11 FLOAT 12 Angle RADIAN Strings 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 3 1 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 953
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 954
    Parameter/Mode Setting DEGREE GRADIAN Exponential Format NORMAL SCIENTIFIC ENGINEERING Complex Format REAL RECTANGULAR POLAR Vector Format RECTANGULAR CYLINDRICAL SPHERICAL Pretty Print OFF ON SplitScreen FULL Strings 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 7 1 2 8 1 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 954
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 955
    Setting TOP-BOTTOM LEFT-RIGHT Split1App (applications are not numbered) Split2App (applications are not numbered) Number of Graphs 1 2 Parameter/Mode Setting Graph 2 FUNCTION PARAMETRIC POLAR SEQUENCE 3D DIFF_EQUATIONS Split Screen Ratio 1:1 1:2 Strings 2 3 9 10 11 1 2 Strings 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 13
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 956
    Parameter/Mode Setting 2:1 Exact/Approx AUTO EXACT APPROXIMATE Base DEC HEX BIN Strings 3 14 1 2 3 15 1 2 3 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 956
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 957
    setGraph( ) Parameter/Mode Setting Coordinates RECT POLAR OFF Graph Order SEQ SIMUL Grid OFF ON Axes In 3D Mode: OFF AXES BOX Not in 3D Mode: OFF Strings 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 957
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 958
    ON 2 Leading Cursor 5 OFF 1 ON 2 Labels 6 OFF 1 ON 1 Seq Axes 7 TIME 1 WEB 2 Custom 3 Solution Method 8 RK 1 EULER 2 Fields 9 SLPFLD 1 DIRFLD 2 FLDOFF 3 DE Axes 10 TIME 1 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 958
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 959
    Y1-VS-Y2 2 T-VS-Y' 3 Y-VS-Y' 4 Y1-VS-Y2' 5 Y1'-VS-Y2' 6 XR Style 11 WIRE FRAME 1 HIDDEN SRUFACE 2 CONTOUR LEVELS 3 WIRE AND CONTOUR 4 IMPLICIT PLOT 5 Appendix C: Programmer's Guide 959
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 960
    setTable( ) Parameter/Mode Setting Graph Table OFF ON Independent AUTO ASK Axes Strings 1 1 2 2 1 2 4 960
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 961
    and Warranty Information Texas Instruments Support and Service For general information Home Page: education.ti.com education.ti.com KnowledgeBase and e-mail inquires: education.ti.com/support education.ti.com/support Phone: (800) TI-CARES; (800) 842-2737 For U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 962
    Islands: Always contact Texas Instruments Customer Support before returning a product for service. All other customers: Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this product (hardware) or contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor. Texas Instruments (TI) Warranty Information Customers
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 963
    model of an equivalent quality (at TI's option) when the product is returned, postage prepaid, to Texas Instruments Service TI strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing. Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant that the software
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 964
    or other incidental or consequential costs, expenses, or damages incurred by the consumer or any other user. Except as expressly provided in the One-Year Limited Warranty for this product, Texas Instruments does not promise that facilities for the repair of this product or parts for the repair of
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 965
    terms of the warranty, refer to your package and/or to the warranty statement enclosed with this product, or contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor. Battery Precautions Take these precautions when replacing batteries: • Do not leave batteries within the reach of children. • Do not
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 966
    TI-89 Titanium Shortcut Keys General ¥O List of Flash applications 2a Toggle between last two chosen applications or split screens ¥ |, ¥ « Lighten or darken contrast ¥ ¸ Calculate ¦−(comment) Copy graph coordinates to sysdata ! (factorial) Display FORMATS dialog box Run programs kbdprgm1( )
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 967
    View along axis Return to original view Change graph format style Expanded/normal view Accent Marks 2 A + letter 2 C + letter 2 E + letter 2 N + letter 2 O + letter 2 U + letter See the table below for shortcuts that are not marked on the Voyage™ 200 keyboard. See the next column for accent
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 968
    Differences There are certain differences in keystrokes using the TI-89 Titanium / Voyage™ 200 for various operations. The following table shows the keystrokes for major commands for the two calculators. FUNCTION LETTERS One lowercase letter (a-s, u, v, w) One lowercase letter (t, x, y, z) Several
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 969
    θ (Theta) | ("With") ' (Prime) ° (Degree) ∠ (Angle) Σ (Sigma) x (Reciprocal) Space HIDDEN SHORTCUTS Place data in sysdata variable Greek characters Keyboard map Place data in Home screen history Grave Cedilla (ç) Acute Tilde Caret Umlaut Question mark) β (Beta) # (Indirection) & (Append) @ (
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 970
    root 906 (%, percent 902 (&, append 602, 905 (', minute notation 908 (', prime 908 ()( ), sum 264, 906 (*( ), integrate 77, 238, 240, 241, 245, 264, 265, 905 (*, multiply 899 (*f(x)dx (graph math tool 329, 332 (+, add 898 (,-- (function keys) moving among toolbar menus . . . 55 selecting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 971
    key command 19 selecting characters 11 (2 K calculator Home screen 26 entering commands 24 exiting modifier key) description 14 status 39 (8 F (FORMATS/GRAPH FORMATS) 18 (8 N (new file 18 (8 O functions 16 entering commands 25 function 16 opening Apps 30 selecting entry/answer pairs . . .
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 972
    ) mode 39 3D graphing 374-408 animation 99 calculation or program . . . . . 9 turning on after 9 append 602, 905 APPLICATIONS menu 177 APPLICATIONS menu (O) . . . 50, 58 approx( ), approximate 785 Approximate mode . .163, 186, 200, 239 approximate, approx 254 Apps (calculator software
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 973
    . 743, 785 augment/concatenate, augment( ) . . 743 Auto mode . . . . .163, 186, 200, 240, 921 AUTO mode status 39 Automatic Power Down (APD) feature during calculation or program . . . . . 9 in OS download mode 68 turning on after 9 automatic simplification 242 automatic tables 459 auto-paste
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 974
    19 toolbar menus 49 turning off the calculator 8 calculator software applications (Apps) 6 icons 5 Calculator-Based Laboratory system connecting 67 Calculator-Based Laboratory. See CBL Calculator-Based Ranger See CBR Calculator-Based Ranger system connecting 67 calculus operations 779
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 975
    , Send 865 statistical data 568, 569 CBR system connecting 67 programs 757 ceiling( ), ceiling 787 ceiling, ceiling 745 certificate 721 . . . . 152, 650 checkTmr( ), check timer 788 circle drawing 493 graphing 85, 88 circle, Circle 631 Circle, draw circle 631, 788 Circular definition error
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 976
    66 devices 66 TI ViewScreen overhead panel . . . 67 TI-Presenter video adapter 67 Voyage 200 66 Constant Memory 145 Constant Memory feature 20 constants 277 predefined 290 contact information 961 contour plots 395, 399, 400 DrwCtour, draw contour 399 contour-level graphing . . . . 102, 394
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 977
    folder status 39 Current mode 20 cursor 3D graph 381 deleting characters 19 free-moving 317, functions 16 entering commands 25 function 16 opening Apps 30 selecting entry/answer pairs . . . Custom, define toolbar 622, 799 customer support and service 961 cut 210, 652 cycle picture,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 978
    columns 535 statistical plots 550 values 523, 524 data/matrix editor 469 date reset 49 setting 41 dayOfWk( ), day of week 802 , 841 Derivatives (graph math tool) . 329, 332, 344 352 deSolve( ), solution 264, 444, 804 det( ), matrix determinant 806 diag( ), matrix diagonal 806 dialog
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 979
    FORMATS/GRAPH FORMATS (8 F 18 menu indicator 53 MODE 20 to open Apps 30 dialog box, define, Dialog . . . . . 621, 806 graphing 409-452 initial conditions 420 second order 427, 444 SLPFLD, slope field . . 414, 423, 448 solution methods . . . . 413, 439, 944 third order 431 troubleshooting
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 980
    . . . 489, 632, 808 line, Line 631, 833 lines 492, 494 on a graph 629 parametric, DrawParm 488, 632, 809 Pencil 491 polar, DrawPol 488, 632, 809 slope, DrawSlp EndFunc 587, 820 if, EndIf 582, 606, 827 loop, EndLoop 614, 837 program, EndPrgm . . . 127, 591, 851 toolbar, EndTBar 621, 888 try,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 981
    troubleshooting 948 Circular definition 595 clear error, ClrErr 636, 790 Memory error 712, 713 Out-of-memory 271 pass error, PassErr 636, 849 programs previews, activities 3D graphing 99, 746 additional graphing topics 108 angle modes 78 baseball 759 CBL 2 program 757 complex factors 769
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 982
    406 integrals 77 log to any base 78 memory management 136 number bases 134 numeric solver 132 oscillating web plots 368 parametric graphing 92, 760 path of a ball 92 polar rose 94 pole-corner problem 737 population 117 predator-prey model 370, 435 prime factors 70 programming 126
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 983
    414, 424, 451 field picture, fldpic 418 File, new (8 N 18 File, open (8 O 18 Fill, matrix fill 816 Flash applications . . 178, 192, 271, 688, 689 692 deleting 721 FLASH APPLICATIONS (8 O) accessing Apps not listed 58 description 50 key command 18 Flash, upgrading operating system . 727, 728
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 984
    49 functions 23, 156 delayed simplification 245 graphing 300 maximum, fMax( ) . . . . 238, 264, 817 minimum, fMin 238, 264, 817 multistatement 477 off, FnOff 308, 627, 818 on, FnOn 308, 627, 818 part, fPart 820 program function, Func . . . . 587, 820 user-defined 193, 220, 269, 377, 475
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 985
    return calculator . go to 826 GRAD(gradian) mode 78 Gradian angle mode 78 graph mode 20, 39 number mode 39 Graph 2 mode 186, 921 GRAPH FORMATS (8 F 18 dialog box 18 Graph mode . . 185, 200, 301, 340, 347, 355 376, 411, 918 graph mode status 39 graph number mode status 39 Graph Order graph
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 986
    graph, Graph 473, 628, 826 Home screen 471, 473 implicit plots 403, 406 independent variable 471 Inflection 329, 333 Intersection 329, 331 inverse functions 489 line styles . . 309, 341, 349, 357, 377 math functions 329 matrix data 469 Maximum 329, 331 Minimum 85, 329, 331 modes 185, 200
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 987
    Greek characters 11, 656, 659 Grid graph format 314 H Hand modifier key (1) to view full name of App 5 highlighting text 651 Home screen. See calculator home screen hyperbolic arccosine , 729, 732, 733, 734 identity matrix, identity 827 identity( ), identity matrix 827 If, if 827 if, If
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 988
    ( ), within string 602, 829 instructions 156 calculator Home screen 26 Catalog 23 insufficient display memory, . 227 int( ), integer 829 intDiv( ), integer divide 682, 829 integer divide, intDiv 682 integer part, iPart 97, 829 integer, int 829 integrate, *( ) 77, 238, 240, 241
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 989
    graph format 314 least common multiple, lcm 831 left( ), left 832 left, left 255, 602 left-right split screen setting 59 setting initial Apps program 632, 724, 725 send chat, SendChat . . . . . 724, 725 send list variable, Send . . . . 634, 865 send to calculator matrix, list4mat 834 matrix to
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 990
    data from a graph 469 determinant, det 806 diagonal, diag 806 dimension, dim 807 dot addition 901 dot division 902 dot multiplication 902 dot power 902 dot subtraction 901 eigenvalue, eigVl 811 eigenvector, eigVc 811 filling, Fill 816 identity, identity 827 list to matrix, list4mat 834
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 991
    summation, sum 862, 882 transpose, T 883 matrix to list, mat4list 838 max( ), maximum 838 Maximum (graph math tool) . . . 329, 331 596, 707, 708, 785 checking 688, 689 insufficient display memory, . 227 resetting 688, 689 unarchive, Unarchiv . 597, 707, 708, 889 VARLINK screen 690,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 992
    602 min( ), minimum 839 Minimum (graph math tool) . 85, 329, 331 minute notation 908 mod( ), modulo 840 modes 183 3D (three-dimensional 39 Angle 20, 39, 185, 303, 919 APPROX 39 Approximate . . . . 163, 186, 200, 921 Apps desktop 20 AUTO 39 Auto 163, 186, 200, 240, 921 Base 20, 186, 922
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 993
    39 SEQ (sequence 39 setting in programs 616 setting, setMode( ) . . . 617, 628, 868 settings 20 Split App 186, 921 Split Screen 186, 920 new matrix 842 NewPic, new picture . . . . . 597, 629, 842 NewPlot, new plot 556, 628, 842 NewProb, new problem 188, 843 nInt( ), numeric integral 264,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 994
    , 239 negative 153 rational 238, 239, 240 numeric derivative, nDeriv 264, 841 integral, nInt 264, 843 solution, nSolve 254, 845 numeric keypad 16 numeric solver . . . . . 665, 669, 673, 674 equations 665, 667, 668 graphing 674, 675, 676, 677 split screens 675, 677 variables 669, 673 O on
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 995
    631, 854 POL (polar) mode 39 polar coordinate, R4Pq 858 coordinate, R4Pr 858 graphing 338 vector display, 4Polar 850 polyEval( ), evaluate polynomial . . . . 850 mode . . . . .20, 163, 185, 920 Prgm, execute program . . . 127, 591, 851 prime number test, isPrime 830 prime numbers 72 995
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 996
    23, 572-644 arguments 584 assembly language 641, 644 branching 582, 606, 609 calling another program 591 CBL 632 CBL 2 system 757 CBR 632 CBR system 757 clear error, ClrErr 636, 790 clear graph, ClrGraph . 475, 627, 790 clear home, ClrHome 791 clear I/O, ClrIO 575, 620, 791 clear table
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 997
    ) 617 821 get/return folder, getFold( ) 617, 822 get/return from calculator, GetCalc . 633 724, 725, 820 get/return key, getKey( ) . /return mode, getMode( ) 617, 823 get/return units, getUnits 825 go to, Goto . . . . . 593, 609, 616, 826 graphs 627 if, If 478, 582, 606, 607, 827 input 574,
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 998
    norm 858 random matrix, randMat 743, 858 norm, randNorm 858 number seed, RandSeed . . 743, 859 number, rand 858 polynomial, randPoly 859 randPoly( ), random polynomial . . . . 859 RandSeed, random number seed . . 743, 859 rational functions activity 751 RclGDB, recall graph database 505, 629
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 999
    864 rowSwap( ), matrix row swap 864 RplcPic, replace picture 629, 864 rref( ), reduced row echelon form . . 260, 743 864 Runge-Kutta method . . . . . 413, 435, 944 S sampling activity 771 SAVE COPY AS (8 S) description 18 dialog box 18 example 54 Scatter plots 555 scientific notation 16
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1000
    , SinReg . 547, 876, 942 slope field, SLPFLD 414, 423, 448 SLPFLD, slope field 414, 423, 448 Smart Graph 316 SocialSt (social studies) category . . . . 33 software version 230 Solution Method graph format 413 solution, deSolve 264, 444, 804 solve( ), solve 74, 80, 446, 876 solve, solve( ) 74
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1001
    split-screen mode active graph 39 exiting 63 Number of graphs 61 Ratio 61 returning from within an App . . . . 32 selecting active App 63 setting 59 setting initial Apps 61 specifying Apps displayed 61 Split 1 App 61 Split 2 App 61 status 37 status and open Apps 5 viewing 20 square root
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1002
    Apps desktop 5 split-screen 37 status line 199, 303 command parameters 25 history information 29 stdDev( ), standard deviation 880 StoGDB, store graph database 505, 629, 880 Stop, stop 880 stop, Stop 579 StoPic, store picture 629, 881 stopping a calculation 906 support and service 961
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1003
    . 372 graphing, GraphTable 456 incrementing, @tbl 456 Independent AUTO/ASK . .457, 459, 464 manual 464 overview 454 programs 627 setTable text 886 text, Text 621, 622 Then, Then 606, 607, 827 three-dimensional graphing . . . . 374-408 animation 99, 390 CONTOUR LEVELS 102, 394 HIDDEN SURFACE
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1004
    356, 434, 435 timeCnv( ), convert time 886 TI-Presenter video adapter connecting 67 Title, title 887 , CustmOn 228, 799 Toolbar menus calculator Home screen 49 moving among 55 , 888 top-bottom split screen setting 59 setting initial Apps 61 status 37 tplot window variable 416 Trace, trace
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1005
    uppercase characters 11 user-defined functions . . .193, 220, 269, 377 475, 477, 585, 587, 803 user-defined units 288 V Value (graph math tool) . locking/unlocking 201, 702 matrix 519 moving, MoveVar 597 overriding 237 pasting name 704, 705 recall 19 referring to App files 30 renaming 699
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1006
    unknown, solving for . . . . . 669, 673 unlocking, Unlock 597 VARLINK . 690, 692, 693, 694, 695, 697 698, 699, 700, 707 variance( ), variance 890 Vector Format mode 185, 920 vector format mode 20 vectors 77 cross product, crossP 795 cylindrical vector display, 4Cylind 800 dot product, dotP
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1007
    . .311, 342, 358, 378 416, 937 ymin window variable 311, 342, 350, 358 378, 416, 937 yscl window variable 311, 342, 350, 358, 416 Z Zero (graph math tool 329, 331 zeroes activity 762 zeroes, zeroes 238, 254, 261 zeroes, zeros 739, 893 zeros( ), zeroes 739, 893 zmax window variable 378 zmin
  • Texas Instruments voyage 200 | User Manual - Page 1008
    ZoomDec, zoom decimal 895 ZoomFit, zoom fit 896 ZoomIn, zoom in 896 ZoomInt, zoom integer 896 ZoomOut, zoom out 897 ZoomPrev, zoom previous 897 ZoomRcl, zoom recall 897 ZoomSqr, zoom square 897 ZoomStd, zoom standard 898 ZoomSto, zoom store 898 ZoomTrig, zoom trig 898 1008
  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • 5
  • 6
  • 7
  • 8
  • 9
  • 10
  • 11
  • 12
  • 13
  • 14
  • 15
  • 16
  • 17
  • 18
  • 19
  • 20
  • 21
  • 22
  • 23
  • 24
  • 25
  • 26
  • 27
  • 28
  • 29
  • 30
  • 31
  • 32
  • 33
  • 34
  • 35
  • 36
  • 37
  • 38
  • 39
  • 40
  • 41
  • 42
  • 43
  • 44
  • 45
  • 46
  • 47
  • 48
  • 49
  • 50
  • 51
  • 52
  • 53
  • 54
  • 55
  • 56
  • 57
  • 58
  • 59
  • 60
  • 61
  • 62
  • 63
  • 64
  • 65
  • 66
  • 67
  • 68
  • 69
  • 70
  • 71
  • 72
  • 73
  • 74
  • 75
  • 76
  • 77
  • 78
  • 79
  • 80
  • 81
  • 82
  • 83
  • 84
  • 85
  • 86
  • 87
  • 88
  • 89
  • 90
  • 91
  • 92
  • 93
  • 94
  • 95
  • 96
  • 97
  • 98
  • 99
  • 100
  • 101
  • 102
  • 103
  • 104
  • 105
  • 106
  • 107
  • 108
  • 109
  • 110
  • 111
  • 112
  • 113
  • 114
  • 115
  • 116
  • 117
  • 118
  • 119
  • 120
  • 121
  • 122
  • 123
  • 124
  • 125
  • 126
  • 127
  • 128
  • 129
  • 130
  • 131
  • 132
  • 133
  • 134
  • 135
  • 136
  • 137
  • 138
  • 139
  • 140
  • 141
  • 142
  • 143
  • 144
  • 145
  • 146
  • 147
  • 148
  • 149
  • 150
  • 151
  • 152
  • 153
  • 154
  • 155
  • 156
  • 157
  • 158
  • 159
  • 160
  • 161
  • 162
  • 163
  • 164
  • 165
  • 166
  • 167
  • 168
  • 169
  • 170
  • 171
  • 172
  • 173
  • 174
  • 175
  • 176
  • 177
  • 178
  • 179
  • 180
  • 181
  • 182
  • 183
  • 184
  • 185
  • 186
  • 187
  • 188
  • 189
  • 190
  • 191
  • 192
  • 193
  • 194
  • 195
  • 196
  • 197
  • 198
  • 199
  • 200
  • 201
  • 202
  • 203
  • 204
  • 205
  • 206
  • 207
  • 208
  • 209
  • 210
  • 211
  • 212
  • 213
  • 214
  • 215
  • 216
  • 217
  • 218
  • 219
  • 220
  • 221
  • 222
  • 223
  • 224
  • 225
  • 226
  • 227
  • 228
  • 229
  • 230
  • 231
  • 232
  • 233
  • 234
  • 235
  • 236
  • 237
  • 238
  • 239
  • 240
  • 241
  • 242
  • 243
  • 244
  • 245
  • 246
  • 247
  • 248
  • 249
  • 250
  • 251
  • 252
  • 253
  • 254
  • 255
  • 256
  • 257
  • 258
  • 259
  • 260
  • 261
  • 262
  • 263
  • 264
  • 265
  • 266
  • 267
  • 268
  • 269
  • 270
  • 271
  • 272
  • 273
  • 274
  • 275
  • 276
  • 277
  • 278
  • 279
  • 280
  • 281
  • 282
  • 283
  • 284
  • 285
  • 286
  • 287
  • 288
  • 289
  • 290
  • 291
  • 292
  • 293
  • 294
  • 295
  • 296
  • 297
  • 298
  • 299
  • 300
  • 301
  • 302
  • 303
  • 304
  • 305
  • 306
  • 307
  • 308
  • 309
  • 310
  • 311
  • 312
  • 313
  • 314
  • 315
  • 316
  • 317
  • 318
  • 319
  • 320
  • 321
  • 322
  • 323
  • 324
  • 325
  • 326
  • 327
  • 328
  • 329
  • 330
  • 331
  • 332
  • 333
  • 334
  • 335
  • 336
  • 337
  • 338
  • 339
  • 340
  • 341
  • 342
  • 343
  • 344
  • 345
  • 346
  • 347
  • 348
  • 349
  • 350
  • 351
  • 352
  • 353
  • 354
  • 355
  • 356
  • 357
  • 358
  • 359
  • 360
  • 361
  • 362
  • 363
  • 364
  • 365
  • 366
  • 367
  • 368
  • 369
  • 370
  • 371
  • 372
  • 373
  • 374
  • 375
  • 376
  • 377
  • 378
  • 379
  • 380
  • 381
  • 382
  • 383
  • 384
  • 385
  • 386
  • 387
  • 388
  • 389
  • 390
  • 391
  • 392
  • 393
  • 394
  • 395
  • 396
  • 397
  • 398
  • 399
  • 400
  • 401
  • 402
  • 403
  • 404
  • 405
  • 406
  • 407
  • 408
  • 409
  • 410
  • 411
  • 412
  • 413
  • 414
  • 415
  • 416
  • 417
  • 418
  • 419
  • 420
  • 421
  • 422
  • 423
  • 424
  • 425
  • 426
  • 427
  • 428
  • 429
  • 430
  • 431
  • 432
  • 433
  • 434
  • 435
  • 436
  • 437
  • 438
  • 439
  • 440
  • 441
  • 442
  • 443
  • 444
  • 445
  • 446
  • 447
  • 448
  • 449
  • 450
  • 451
  • 452
  • 453
  • 454
  • 455
  • 456
  • 457
  • 458
  • 459
  • 460
  • 461
  • 462
  • 463
  • 464
  • 465
  • 466
  • 467
  • 468
  • 469
  • 470
  • 471
  • 472
  • 473
  • 474
  • 475
  • 476
  • 477
  • 478
  • 479
  • 480
  • 481
  • 482
  • 483
  • 484
  • 485
  • 486
  • 487
  • 488
  • 489
  • 490
  • 491
  • 492
  • 493
  • 494
  • 495
  • 496
  • 497
  • 498
  • 499
  • 500
  • 501
  • 502
  • 503
  • 504
  • 505
  • 506
  • 507
  • 508
  • 509
  • 510
  • 511
  • 512
  • 513
  • 514
  • 515
  • 516
  • 517
  • 518
  • 519
  • 520
  • 521
  • 522
  • 523
  • 524
  • 525
  • 526
  • 527
  • 528
  • 529
  • 530
  • 531
  • 532
  • 533
  • 534
  • 535
  • 536
  • 537
  • 538
  • 539
  • 540
  • 541
  • 542
  • 543
  • 544
  • 545
  • 546
  • 547
  • 548
  • 549
  • 550
  • 551
  • 552
  • 553
  • 554
  • 555
  • 556
  • 557
  • 558
  • 559
  • 560
  • 561
  • 562
  • 563
  • 564
  • 565
  • 566
  • 567
  • 568
  • 569
  • 570
  • 571
  • 572
  • 573
  • 574
  • 575
  • 576
  • 577
  • 578
  • 579
  • 580
  • 581
  • 582
  • 583
  • 584
  • 585
  • 586
  • 587
  • 588
  • 589
  • 590
  • 591
  • 592
  • 593
  • 594
  • 595
  • 596
  • 597
  • 598
  • 599
  • 600
  • 601
  • 602
  • 603
  • 604
  • 605
  • 606
  • 607
  • 608
  • 609
  • 610
  • 611
  • 612
  • 613
  • 614
  • 615
  • 616
  • 617
  • 618
  • 619
  • 620
  • 621
  • 622
  • 623
  • 624
  • 625
  • 626
  • 627
  • 628
  • 629
  • 630
  • 631
  • 632
  • 633
  • 634
  • 635
  • 636
  • 637
  • 638
  • 639
  • 640
  • 641
  • 642
  • 643
  • 644
  • 645
  • 646
  • 647
  • 648
  • 649
  • 650
  • 651
  • 652
  • 653
  • 654
  • 655
  • 656
  • 657
  • 658
  • 659
  • 660
  • 661
  • 662
  • 663
  • 664
  • 665
  • 666
  • 667
  • 668
  • 669
  • 670
  • 671
  • 672
  • 673
  • 674
  • 675
  • 676
  • 677
  • 678
  • 679
  • 680
  • 681
  • 682
  • 683
  • 684
  • 685
  • 686
  • 687
  • 688
  • 689
  • 690
  • 691
  • 692
  • 693
  • 694
  • 695
  • 696
  • 697
  • 698
  • 699
  • 700
  • 701
  • 702
  • 703
  • 704
  • 705
  • 706
  • 707
  • 708
  • 709
  • 710
  • 711
  • 712
  • 713
  • 714
  • 715
  • 716
  • 717
  • 718
  • 719
  • 720
  • 721
  • 722
  • 723
  • 724
  • 725
  • 726
  • 727
  • 728
  • 729
  • 730
  • 731
  • 732
  • 733
  • 734
  • 735
  • 736
  • 737
  • 738
  • 739
  • 740
  • 741
  • 742
  • 743
  • 744
  • 745
  • 746
  • 747
  • 748
  • 749
  • 750
  • 751
  • 752
  • 753
  • 754
  • 755
  • 756
  • 757
  • 758
  • 759
  • 760
  • 761
  • 762
  • 763
  • 764
  • 765
  • 766
  • 767
  • 768
  • 769
  • 770
  • 771
  • 772
  • 773
  • 774
  • 775
  • 776
  • 777
  • 778
  • 779
  • 780
  • 781
  • 782
  • 783
  • 784
  • 785
  • 786
  • 787
  • 788
  • 789
  • 790
  • 791
  • 792
  • 793
  • 794
  • 795
  • 796
  • 797
  • 798
  • 799
  • 800
  • 801
  • 802
  • 803
  • 804
  • 805
  • 806
  • 807
  • 808
  • 809
  • 810
  • 811
  • 812
  • 813
  • 814
  • 815
  • 816
  • 817
  • 818
  • 819
  • 820
  • 821
  • 822
  • 823
  • 824
  • 825
  • 826
  • 827
  • 828
  • 829
  • 830
  • 831
  • 832
  • 833
  • 834
  • 835
  • 836
  • 837
  • 838
  • 839
  • 840
  • 841
  • 842
  • 843
  • 844
  • 845
  • 846
  • 847
  • 848
  • 849
  • 850
  • 851
  • 852
  • 853
  • 854
  • 855
  • 856
  • 857
  • 858
  • 859
  • 860
  • 861
  • 862
  • 863
  • 864
  • 865
  • 866
  • 867
  • 868
  • 869
  • 870
  • 871
  • 872
  • 873
  • 874
  • 875
  • 876
  • 877
  • 878
  • 879
  • 880
  • 881
  • 882
  • 883
  • 884
  • 885
  • 886
  • 887
  • 888
  • 889
  • 890
  • 891
  • 892
  • 893
  • 894
  • 895
  • 896
  • 897
  • 898
  • 899
  • 900
  • 901
  • 902
  • 903
  • 904
  • 905
  • 906
  • 907
  • 908
  • 909
  • 910
  • 911
  • 912
  • 913
  • 914
  • 915
  • 916
  • 917
  • 918
  • 919
  • 920
  • 921
  • 922
  • 923
  • 924
  • 925
  • 926
  • 927
  • 928
  • 929
  • 930
  • 931
  • 932
  • 933
  • 934
  • 935
  • 936
  • 937
  • 938
  • 939
  • 940
  • 941
  • 942
  • 943
  • 944
  • 945
  • 946
  • 947
  • 948
  • 949
  • 950
  • 951
  • 952
  • 953
  • 954
  • 955
  • 956
  • 957
  • 958
  • 959
  • 960
  • 961
  • 962
  • 963
  • 964
  • 965
  • 966
  • 967
  • 968
  • 969
  • 970
  • 971
  • 972
  • 973
  • 974
  • 975
  • 976
  • 977
  • 978
  • 979
  • 980
  • 981
  • 982
  • 983
  • 984
  • 985
  • 986
  • 987
  • 988
  • 989
  • 990
  • 991
  • 992
  • 993
  • 994
  • 995
  • 996
  • 997
  • 998
  • 999
  • 1,000
  • 1,001
  • 1,002
  • 1,003
  • 1,004
  • 1,005
  • 1,006
  • 1,007
  • 1,008

1
Voyage™ 200
Voyage™ 200
Voyage™ 200
Voyage™ 200
Graphing Calculator
Graphing Calculator
Graphing Calculator
Graphing Calculator